Added extensible special buffer support to desktop.el. See the
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e
DL
29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 31
d9c9b920
DL
32** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
33new display features described below.
34
35** There is some code for Macintosh support, but this is from the
36Emacs 20 port. It needs updating before this version of Emacs will
37work on Macintosh.
38
1fa28578
GM
39\f
40* Changes in Emacs 21.1
41
4c724b32
DL
42** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
43`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
44
059cd2e1 45+++
6a0b0752
MB
46** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
47to be visited as images.
48
b856f39c 49+++
068127d6
GM
50** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
51operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
52
fd06c7da
MB
53** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
54(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
55remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
56may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
57
8ac08dea 58+++
62c273d7
DL
59** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
60is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
61
62+++
63** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
64mode `iswitchb-mode'.
65
8ac08dea 66+++
f393cf90
DL
67** Gnus changes.
68
69The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
70four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
71internationalization and mail-fetching.
72
73*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
74many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
75
76If you used procmail like in
77
78(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
79(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
80(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
81(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
82
327652be 83this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
84
85(setq mail-sources
86 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
87 :suffix ".in")))
88
89More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
90Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
91
92*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
93Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
94
60dd7e0e
DL
95*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
96parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
97Separate MIME packages like SEMI will not work. There are built-in
98facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is now just a
99compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
100
101*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
102called to position point.
103
104*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
105summary buffers and NOV files.
106
107*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
108of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
109
110*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
111subtly different manner.
112
113*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
114and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
115ever-changing layouts.
116
117*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
118
119*** There is image support.
120
121** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1228859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
123more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
124empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
125window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
126on.
127
ba9eeda1
GM
128** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
129set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
130file that is already visited under a different name.
131
42ac0ae5
GM
132** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
133nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
134
135** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
136recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
137signaled.
138
ba9eeda1 139** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
140support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
141use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
142buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
143M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
144new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
145
b941a14b 146+++
ba9eeda1 147** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 148and displays information about that.
b941a14b 149
ba9eeda1 150** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
151file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
152
d7b38c05 153** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 154added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
155Postscript files are included.
156
157** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
158`dired-ref.tex'.
159
25ad1371
GM
160** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
161expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
162
163This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
164determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
165mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
166interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
167regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
168associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
169
b856f39c 170+++
f0298744
DL
171** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
172displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
173menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
174menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
175
9a8d84ca
DL
176** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
177a version-dependent component.
178
d76c03ea
GM
179** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
180Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
181will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
182character is still bound as before.
183
3b4fa1b2
DL
184** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
185using that menu.
186
40e857ea 187** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 188suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 189
beb2eb00 190+++
c08398de
DL
191** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
192buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
193contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
194by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
195insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
196the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
197Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
198
db7a3ede 199+++
3d6cd763
GM
200** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
201coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
202escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
203such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
204recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 205always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 206read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
207(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
208RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 209
0b8a3a6d
DL
210** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
211environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
212
424d8b44 213+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
214** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
215point in a pop-up window.
216
6d35b49f 217+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
218** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
219displays all characters in that character set.
220
221** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
222coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
223
a4067978 224+++
5cb6a58e 225** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
226on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
227defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 228
424d8b44 229+++
a1b8d58b
GM
230** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
231
6e417ca5
DL
232** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
233been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
234
424d8b44 235+++
5898e075
DL
236** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
237`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
238indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
239indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
240
424d8b44 241+++
abfcc168
GM
242** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
243sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 244(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
245You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
246
424d8b44 247+++
cc181e95
GM
248** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
249on the display using several methods
250
424d8b44 251+++
cc181e95
GM
252- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
253a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
254be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
255
424d8b44 256+++
cc181e95
GM
257- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
258equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
259
da4496b6 260- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
261
262- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
263the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
264
424d8b44 265+++
3b4fa1b2 266** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 267an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 268command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 269does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 270
424d8b44 271+++
176256a1 272** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
273`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
274typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 275
dd0add8e
DL
276** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
277characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
278
bf3ba9ac 279+++
699238d9
GM
280** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
281compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
282this behavior.
283
284The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
285compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
286Emacs dump core.
287
424d8b44 288+++
699238d9 289** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 290
7233c5bd
GM
291*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
292whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
293is useful for debugging X problems.
294
295Example:
296
699238d9 297 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 298
100b3cbb
GM
299*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
300visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
301the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
302and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
303visual class names are
304
305 TrueColor
306 PseudoColor
307 DirectColor
308 StaticColor
309 GrayScale
310 StaticGray
311
312Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
313`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
314meaning.
315
316The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
317supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
318`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
319visual.
320
321Example:
322
699238d9 323 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
324
325*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
326specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
327default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
328resource values are `true' or `on'.
329
330Example:
331
699238d9 332 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 333
0d0c76b8
EZ
334** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
335more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
336now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
337
42088c12 338** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 339display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
340shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
341be customized.
c60ea02e 342
424d8b44 343+++
31047e0d
DL
344** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
345
424d8b44 346+++
b02786f9
GM
347** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
348all frames except the selected one.
349
3261c1d8
DL
350** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
351to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
352
ffe36136 353** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
354the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
355MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
356displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
357
0292b49f 358+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
359** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
360MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 361
559cee90
DL
362** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
363read mail from the menu etc.
364
480b5773 365+++
271b4185
GM
366** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
367a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
368
0daee095
GM
369** Changes in Texinfo mode.
370
371** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
372macros
373
374 Key binding Macro
375 -------------------------
376 C-c C-c C-s @strong
377 C-c C-c C-e @emph
378 C-c C-c u @url
379 C-c C-c q @quotation
380 C-c C-c m @email
381
559cee90
DL
382** Changes in Outline mode.
383
384There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
385`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
386the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
387
327652be 388** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 389
c0a8c108
EZ
390+++
391*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
392with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
393are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
394Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
395buffers to kill, as before.
396
397Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 398i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
399this way.
400
956777b3
GM
401** Changes to Show Paren mode.
402
403*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
404The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
405use. Default is 1000.
406
f6989277 407+++
404fa7d6
DL
408** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
409groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
410
424d8b44
DL
411+++
412** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
413M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
414M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
415buffers.
8964fec7 416
424d8b44 417+++
39783d73
WP
418** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
419under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
420.emacs file.
421
422The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
423determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
424
d35fce81
GM
425** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
426abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
427`directory-abbrev-alist'.
428
a933dad1
DL
429** Faces and frame parameters.
430
431There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
432Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
433`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
434`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
435sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
436for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
437parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
438
439Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
440`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 441`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
442`default' face and vice versa.
443
d80061fa 444+++
f77a4a8a
GM
445** New face `menu'.
446
447The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
448Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
449attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
450
424d8b44 451+++
a933dad1
DL
452** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
453
454The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
455colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
456correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
457the screen gamma of a frame's display.
458
459PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
460in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
461color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
462
463The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
464`ScreenGamma'.
465
466** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
467
468The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
469Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
470oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
471of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
472the text.
473
474** Emacs has a new face implementation.
475
476The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
477font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
478height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
479These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
480specify a font.
481
482Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
483These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
484under Lisp changes, below.
485
486** New default font is Courier 12pt.
487
424d8b44
DL
488+++
489** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
490of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
491otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
492
493** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
494truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
495foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
496customizing face `fringe'.
497
498** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
499can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
500
501** LessTif support.
502
424d8b44
DL
503Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
504You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
505
506** Toolkit scroll bars.
507
508Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
509LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
510configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
511bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
512bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
513Emacs.
514
515When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
516Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
517Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
518Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
519define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
520`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
521
522Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
523a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
524directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
525different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
526system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
527add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
528
529The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
530`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
531This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
532image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
533Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
534
535** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
536
537When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
538widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
539Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
540
424d8b44 541+++
a933dad1
DL
542** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
543
544When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
545whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
546defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
547highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
548displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
549whitespace.
550
6e612d4d 551+++
a933dad1
DL
552** Busy-cursor.
553
554Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
555display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
556
424d8b44 557+++
a933dad1
DL
558** Blinking cursor
559
560M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
561terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
562and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
563the group `cursor'.
564
8ac08dea 565+++
a933dad1
DL
566** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
567
568This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
569generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
570See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
571details.
572
573Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
574have to do anything to activate it.
575
576** Tabs and variable-width text.
577
578Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
579defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
580independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
581Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
582
583** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
584
424d8b44 585+++
a933dad1
DL
586*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
587
588 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
589
79dd1637
RS
590The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
591LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 592
79dd1637
RS
593*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
594LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 595
34d90e29 596+++
a933dad1
DL
597** Hscrolling in C code.
598
cc181e95
GM
599Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
600`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
601customized.
a933dad1 602
8ac08dea 603+++
a933dad1
DL
604** Tool bar support.
605
606Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
607of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
608changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
609displayed. To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of
610extra icons for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 611
424d8b44 612+++
a933dad1
DL
613** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
614
615Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
616mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
617line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
618about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
619in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
620
621Currently, the following actions have been defined:
622
623- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
624buffers.
625
626- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
627M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
628
629- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
630
424d8b44
DL
631- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
632`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
633
634- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
635
636** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
637
638When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 639from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
640non-nil.
641
642** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
643
644Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
645Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
646the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
647italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
648Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
649attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
650on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
651
652** Sound support
653
2f516940 654Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 655driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 656supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 657
424d8b44 658+++
a933dad1
DL
659** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
660the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
661forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
662value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
663users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
664even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
665
666The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
667
0e18b431 668+++
a933dad1
DL
669** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
670
671As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
672drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
673`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
674
fdd8bb68 675+++
a933dad1
DL
676** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
677bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
678
679This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
680`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
681variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
682
c5d00c64 683+++
a933dad1
DL
684** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
685
686When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
687value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
688number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 689fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
690
691When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
692value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
693number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 694fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
695
696** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
697notably at the end of lines.
698
699All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
700spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
701
424d8b44 702+++
eee54b0e
DL
703There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
704
a933dad1
DL
705** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
706query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
707after each match to get the replacement text.
708
00782214 709+++
d5483ab1
GM
710** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
711you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 712
424d8b44 713** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
714you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
715lisp-complete-symbol.
716
7af69644 717+++
a933dad1
DL
718** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
719
163ea954
RS
720If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
721longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
722it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
723window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
724
725- User option: max-mini-window-height
726
727Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
728fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
729specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
730
731Default is 0.25.
732
2f72fd2f
GM
733** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
734
0d43b60d
GM
735** Changes to hideshow.el
736
737Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
738selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
739conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
740
741*** Generalized block selection and traversal
742
743A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
744(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
745which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
746`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
747point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
748(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
749
750If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
751i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
752backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
753the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
754
755*** Isearch support for updating mode line
756
757During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
758blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
759line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
760portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
761is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
762
763To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
764something like this in your .emacs.
765
766 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
767 (lambda ()
768 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
769
327652be
TTN
770*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
771
772Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
773header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
774`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
775moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
776block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
777behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
778useful.
779
780You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
781function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
782of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
783code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
784appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
785
786(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
787 (hs-hide-level 1)
788 (forward-sexp 1))
789(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
790
791The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
792emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
793only for code blocks.
794
795*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
796
797Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
798parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
799display for implementation.
800
801*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
802
803The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
804LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
805which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
806new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
807
808 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
809 hs-show-block C-c C-s
810 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
811 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
812 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
813 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
814 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
815
816These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
817
559cee90
DL
818** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
819
424d8b44 820+++
1b24b888
GM
821*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
822an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
823log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
824
424d8b44 825+++
1b24b888
GM
826**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
827current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
828
829+++
1b24b888
GM
830*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
831in a log file.
eb2aac9d 832
502004be 833+++
1b24b888
GM
834*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
835entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 836
502004be 837+++
1b24b888 838*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
839version number is performed based on regular expressions from
840`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
841Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 842
1b24b888
GM
843*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock
844highlighting.
845
3476b54a
GM
846** Changes in Font Lock
847
848*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
849font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
850mode.
851
b3b98592
GM
852** Comint (subshell) changes
853
66b6c480 854By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
f8d54c98 855distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
66b6c480
MB
856the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
857attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
858Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
859boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
860To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
861`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
862
b3b98592
GM
863Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
864and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
865
866The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
867buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
868buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
869
870The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
871M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
872the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
873
8c1bec7c
MB
874Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
875now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
876previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
877user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 878
e26cec67
GM
879** Changes to Rmail mode
880
c0510d27
GM
881*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
882set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
883receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
884recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
885`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
886as correspondent.
887
888Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
889mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 890regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 891
3b55acc9
GM
892*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
893to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
894Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
895with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
896for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
897
6a1950ec
GM
898*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
899like `j'.
900
5bb6f079
RS
901*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
902specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 903digest message.
e26cec67 904
993d8b7d
DL
905*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
906in which folder to put messages automatically.
907
400a1ed0
GM
908** Changes to TeX mode
909
910The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
911`latex-mode'.
912
a933dad1
DL
913** Changes to RefTeX mode
914
915*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
916 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
917 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
918 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
919 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
920 can be edited from that buffer.
921
922*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
923 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
924 `A' to use all marked entries).
925
926*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
927 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
928
929*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
930 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
931 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
932 been cited.
933
38de9631
GM
934** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
935The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
936semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
937in column 1 are always made leaves.
938
a933dad1
DL
939** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
940has the following new features:
941
942*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
943may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
944to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
945time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
946
947*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
948feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
949file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
950compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
951pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
952defaults to 1.
953
5d94f558 954** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
955file names.
956
424d8b44 957+++
a933dad1
DL
958** Tooltips.
959
960Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
961mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
962can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
963
964Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
965variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
966the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
967tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
968
424d8b44 969+++
a933dad1
DL
970** Customize changes
971
972*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
973`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
974cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
975
976*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
977Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
978default).
979
0ae51efb
GM
980*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
981between custom options. Example:
982
983 (defcustom default-input-method nil
984 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
985 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
986 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
987 :group 'mule
988 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
989 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
990
991This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
992current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
993first in a custom-set-variables statement.
994
a933dad1
DL
995** New features in evaluation commands
996
5e03eb84 997*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
998modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
999print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1000customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1001eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1002
5e03eb84
GM
1003*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1004code when called with a prefix argument.
1005
ead53494
GM
1006** Ispell changes
1007
37d8a691 1008+++
bbe15990
EZ
1009*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1010transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1011spell-checks the current buffer.
1012
37d8a691 1013+++
385ff9e3
GM
1014*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1015added.
1016
1017*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1018correction is made and re-checked.
1019
74ec6045 1020*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1021
1022*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1023cases.
1024
1025*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1026on syntax errors.
1027
1028*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1029end of the buffer.
1030
a933dad1
DL
1031** Dired changes
1032
1033*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1034command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1035is, delete only empty directories.
1036
1037*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1038command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1039copy directories recursively.
1040
f6737cde
GM
1041*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1042in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1043the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1044
2f72fd2f
GM
1045*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1046replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1047directory.
1048
7381ae05
MB
1049*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1050a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1051This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1052will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1053accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1054
e024b101
GM
1055*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1056from ls switches.
1057
a933dad1
DL
1058** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1059use the -f option when sending mail.
1060
b1c609b1
GM
1061** CC mode changes.
1062
1063Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1064current user setups (although it's believed that these
1065incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1066However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1067back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1068compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1069release.
1070
7972fcfc
GM
1071*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1072This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1073of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1074non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1075want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1076have to bother.
1077
1078Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1079situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1080and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1081If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1082the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1083by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1084
b1c609b1
GM
1085*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1086When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1087variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1088take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1089is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1090settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1091possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1092Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1093
1094By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1095special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1096the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1097of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1098above.
1099
1100Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1101when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1102function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1103call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1104then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1105values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1106only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1107function documentation for more info.
1108
1109The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1110especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1111with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1112intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1113such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1114is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1115configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1116global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1117
1118(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1119
1120**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1121This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1122
1123This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1124variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1125completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1126the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1127empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1128style system.
1129
1130**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1131In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1132c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1133as far as possible.
1134
1135*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1136CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1137surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1138chapter about this in the manual.
1139
1140**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1141The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1142recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1143primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1144adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1145
1146**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1147This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1148c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1149
1150**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1151This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1152
1153It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1154Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1155A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1156inside CC Mode.
1157
1158Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1159causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1160the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1161available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1162cc-mode/).
1163
1164**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1165The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1166specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1167literals.
1168
1169**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1170It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1171prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1172you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1173this function.
1174
1175*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1176It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1177to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1178struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1179Thanks to Eric Eide.
1180
1181*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1182It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1183opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1184
1185**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1186
1187*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1188See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1189better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1190and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1191
1192*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1193previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1194the column specified by comment-column.
1195
1196*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1197In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1198is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1199prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1200contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1201don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1202
1203*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1204instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1205arguments.
1206
1207*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1208
1209*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1210c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1211c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1212variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1213Provan).
1214
1215*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1216
c407c570
GM
1217** Makefile mode changes
1218
1219*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1220
5d94f558 1221*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1222Fontlock mode is active.
1223
87be76f6
GM
1224** Isearch changes
1225
3353ef5a
GM
1226*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1227so that searches can be resumed.
1228
1229*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1230respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1231that started the search.
1232
87be76f6 1233*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1234selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1235
c8a8458a 1236+++
87be76f6
GM
1237*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1238
d35fce81 1239Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1240`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1241search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1242before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1243highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1244`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1245
1246The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1247will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1248Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1249using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1250usual snappy response.
1251
1252If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1253matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1254set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1255isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1256
21bc6203 1257+++
35384f06
GM
1258** Changes in sort.el
1259
1260The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1261as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1262new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1263numeric base.
87be76f6 1264
d7b511c4
GM
1265** Changes to Ange-ftp
1266
424d8b44 1267+++
d7b511c4 1268*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1269names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1270sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1271
d7b511c4
GM
1272*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1273ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1274
9d453139
SS
1275*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1276output ^M at the end of lines.
1277
4b9347b3
GM
1278** Shell script mode changes.
1279
1280Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1281derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1282sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1283
79214ddf
FP
1284** Etags changes.
1285
1286*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1287
aca0be23 1288*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1289possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1290{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1291This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1292a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1293
79214ddf
FP
1294*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1295declarations when given the --declarations option.
1296
1297*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1298"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1299
1300*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1301types.
1302
de370c4c 1303*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1304
1305*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1306
1307*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1308are now tagged.
1309
1310*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1311variables are tagged.
1312
1313*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1314
8dc78b52
FP
1315*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1316for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1317
c8d94f86 1318+++
f6737cde
GM
1319** Changes in etags.el
1320
3f6e4b8b
GM
1321*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1322tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1323is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1324
f6737cde
GM
1325*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1326the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1327
1328If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1329FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1330TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1331obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1332
1333TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1334
1335FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1336List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1337
1338A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1339
1340 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1341 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1342 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1343
1344*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1345of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1346
1347*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1348names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1349
424d8b44 1350+++
fbc164de
PE
1351** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1352and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1353LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1354
c3eb1f10 1355+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1356** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1357Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
13588859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1359GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
13608859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1361releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1362(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1363
424d8b44 1364+++
163ea954 1365** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1366remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1367appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1368
1369** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1370
424d8b44 1371+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1372** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1373
6ab8d72d 1374+++
f6499c03 1375** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1376containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1377expression from that list, are not checked.
1378
5d94f558
SS
1379** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1380When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1381and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1382the buffer, just like for the local files.
1383
dc28878c
GM
1384** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1385
df8a9f78 1386+++
95931eb1
GM
1387** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1388displays local abbrevs, only.
1389
54baed30
GM
1390** VC Changes
1391
1392VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1393easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1394Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1395to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1396changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1397`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1398version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1399each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1400file is registered in that backend.
1401
1402When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1403backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1404directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1405master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1406the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1407As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1408
1409The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1410still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1411RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1412vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1413where it doesn't make sense.)
1414
1415The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1416obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1417`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1418
1419*** General Changes
1420
1421The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1422checks are always done now.
1423
327652be 1424VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1425operations.
1426
1427*** Changes for CVS
1428
1429There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1430default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1431remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1432by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1433regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1434that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1435queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1436
1437If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1438repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1439If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1440commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1441current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1442entire directory tree.
1443
1444The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1445"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1446is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1447"watched" by other developers.)
1448
1449*** Lisp Changes in VC
1450
1451VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1452add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1453library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1454then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1455a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1456provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1457of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1458you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1459`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1460
a933dad1
DL
1461** New modes and packages
1462
ff332647 1463+++
90cbf47e
GM
1464*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1465intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1466typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1467on certain projects.
1468
894ca69e 1469+++
90cbf47e 1470*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1471regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1472
d96d6bb0 1473 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1474
1475will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1476face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1477typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1478Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1479appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1480current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1481corresponding file is read.
1482
424d8b44 1483+++
d96d6bb0 1484*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1485Emacs is idle.
1486
31fc5d15
GM
1487*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1488parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1489
5cb6a58e
SM
1490*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1491package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1492be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1493
424d8b44 1494+++
578979ee
GM
1495*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1496facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1497separate Texinfo file.
1498
424d8b44
DL
1499+++
1500*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1501by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1502provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1503`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1504enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1505
424d8b44 1506+++
6abca616
EZ
1507*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1508without invoking external programs.
1509
1510The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1511and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1512`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1513is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1514Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1515
1516The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1517page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1518
719e2c6e 1519+++
5e5dff44
GM
1520*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1521authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1522
1523The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1524the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1525the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1526Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1527even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1528single step.
1529
1530On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1531matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1532probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1533contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1534
424d8b44 1535+++
f7136ee8
GM
1536*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1537unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1538actually modifying content of a buffer.
1539
bbd9b566
GM
1540*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1541PostScript.
1542
1543Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1544
1545The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1546
1547 ; comment (until end of line)
1548 A non-terminal
1549 "C" terminal
1550 ?C? special
1551 $A default non-terminal
1552 $"C" default terminal
1553 $?C? default special
1554 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1555 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1556 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1557 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1558 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1559 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1560 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1561 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1562 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1563 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1564 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1565 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1566 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1567 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1568 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1569
1570Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1571
99453a38
GM
1572*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1573align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1574determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1575example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1576equal signs of assignments.
1577
424d8b44 1578+++
559cee90
DL
1579*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1580paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1581
424d8b44 1582+++
6448a6b3
GM
1583*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1584list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1585buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1586customize the package.
1587
6344985d
GM
1588*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1589
249652b1
GM
1590*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1591replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1592is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1593and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1594not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1595which answers different needs.
1596
424d8b44 1597+++
3476b54a
GM
1598*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1599suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1600expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1601course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1602reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1603to be enabled.
1604
424d8b44 1605+++
8964fec7
SM
1606*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1607containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1608
424d8b44 1609+++
a933dad1
DL
1610*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1611
424d8b44 1612+++
a933dad1
DL
1613*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1614
1615*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1616
8901d1ac
GM
1617Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1618`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1619disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1620`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1621displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1622and background colors.
1623
a933dad1
DL
1624*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1625Pascal) language.
1626
f6499c03 1627+++
a933dad1
DL
1628*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1629the text at point.
1630
1631*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1632
424d8b44 1633+++
8d54eb69
DL
1634*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1635
a933dad1
DL
1636*** whitespace.el ???
1637
ebcfda83
GM
1638*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1639files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1640(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1641interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1642often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1643uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1644codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1645
1646*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1647
1648Here is an example of columns:
1649
1650horse apple bus
1651dog pineapple car EXTRA
1652porcupine strawberry airplane
1653
1654Doing the following settings:
1655
1656 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1657 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1658 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1659 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1660
1661
1662Selecting the lines above and typing:
1663
1664 M-x delimit-columns-region
1665
1666It results:
1667
1668[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1669[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1670[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1671
1672delim-col has the following options:
1673
1674 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1675 before all columns.
1676
1677 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1678 between each column.
1679
1680 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1681 after all columns.
1682
1683 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1684 each column.
1685
1686delim-col has the following commands:
1687
1688 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1689 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1690
424d8b44 1691+++
f507826c 1692*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1693were operated on recently.
1694
1695M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1696
31fc5d15
GM
1697M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1698recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1699
31fc5d15
GM
1700M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1701filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1702file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1703
31fc5d15
GM
1704- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1705- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1706- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1707
31fc5d15
GM
1708The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1709dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1710
8062f458
DL
1711*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1712text.
1713
424d8b44 1714+++
36e24b82 1715*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1716of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1717specific to Message mode.
1718
424d8b44 1719+++
36e24b82
DL
1720*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1721viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1722with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1723
424d8b44 1724+++
aaa659ef
DL
1725*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1726interface to access directory servers using different directory
1727protocols. It has a separate manual.
1728
eee54b0e
DL
1729*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1730for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1731
424d8b44 1732+++
612839b6
GM
1733*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1734
5d94f558 1735*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1736minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1737
399da7e3
DL
1738*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1739with the diary features.
1740
6e417ca5
DL
1741*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1742numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1743
4a27bdfb
GM
1744*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1745Fill mode.
1746
60dd7e0e
DL
1747*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1748Gnus facilities.
1749
a933dad1
DL
1750** Withdrawn packages
1751
1752*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1753functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1754
3261c1d8
DL
1755*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1756
1757*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1758
1759\f
1760* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1761(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1762
4fbdfdcf
MB
1763+++
1764** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1765the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1766message.
1767
6a0b0752
MB
1768** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1769expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1770
47e351a3
GM
1771** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1772with the more general `:mask' property.
1773
ba9eeda1
GM
1774** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1775
a2bd77b8
GM
1776** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1777backslash.
1778
424d8b44
DL
1779+++
1780** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1781is running in batch mode. For example,
1782
1783 (message "%s" (read t))
1784
1785will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1786to standard output.
1787
1788+++
1789** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1790`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1791
ead53494
GM
1792** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1793will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1794frame or window.
1795
f6499c03 1796+++
27848c01
GM
1797** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1798were added
1799
1800- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1801
1802Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1803a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1804
1805- Function: remq ELT LIST
1806
1807Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1808comparison is done with `eq'.
1809
1810** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1811
b548072f
GM
1812** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1813has been changed.
1814
424d8b44 1815+++
07b14857
KH
1816** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1817without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1818convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1819
9662da0b
GM
1820** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1821or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1822
7fce7efb
DL
1823** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1824function was declared obsolete.
1825
5d94f558 1826** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1827retained as an alias).
1828
f98d3086
SM
1829** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1830It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1831is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1832
87efd256
GM
1833** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1834
1835- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1836
1837Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1838MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1839
67c9a1d2
GM
1840** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1841
1842- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1843
1844Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1845
1846This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1847calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1848argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1849value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1850returned.
1851
1852Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1853if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1854it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1855minibuffer even if it is active.
1856
1857Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1858counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1859too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1860and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1861`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1862entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1863
1864ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1865ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1866ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1867ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1868ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1869If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1870Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1871
ead53494
GM
1872** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1873event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1874argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1875
25fa6deb
GM
1876** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1877call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1878message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1879Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1880
5d94f558 1881** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1882meaning no limit.
1883
5d94f558 1884** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1885coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1886DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1887
80c05bd3 1888** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1889of a primitive.
1890
80c05bd3
DL
1891** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1892buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1893This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1894than replacing the local map.
1895
4bc7a543
DL
1896** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1897after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1898
1899** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1900
f6499c03 1901+++
f0298744
DL
1902** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1903promised long ago.
1904
5d94f558 1905** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1906\f
1907* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1908
1909Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1910--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1911When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1912so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1913
85c75536
MB
1914*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1915buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1916the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1917restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1918
0b8a3a6d
DL
1919*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1920`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1921when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1922multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1923
1924*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1925`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1926contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1927
1928*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1929changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1930[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1931regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1932the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1933extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1934bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1935eight-bit-graphic.
1936
1937** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1938
1939A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1940a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1941character set as previously.
1942
1943*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1944They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1945modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1946
1947CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1948characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1949range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1950case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1951
1952FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1953name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1954
1955*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1956registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1957"fontset-default".
1958
1959*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1960argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1961
1962** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1963composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1964buffers and strings.
1965
1966*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1967character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1968code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1969have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1970composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1971composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1972The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1973also been deleted.
1974
1975*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1976specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1977`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1978
1979*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1980MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1981composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1982may differ between buffer and string text.
1983
1984*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1985COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1986
1987*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1988directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1989Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1990`composition' from STRING.
1991
1992*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1993a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1994
1995*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1996obsolete.
1997
1998** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1999Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
2000character set is not used.
2001
2002** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2003`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2004X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2005
2006+++
2007** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2008are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 20090xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2010
399da7e3 2011+++
f0124b4a
DL
2012** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2013that offset in the file before writing.
2014
f98d3086
SM
2015** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2016compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2017
612839b6
GM
2018** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2019`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2020from which the command was issued.
2021
2022** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2023`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2024`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2025additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2026operate on.
2027
271b4185
GM
2028** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2029to `window-buffer-height'.
2030
2031- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2032
2033Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2034The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2035lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2036
2037Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2038respectively.
2039
2040If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2041COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2042
2043The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2044obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2045on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2046
2047Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2048buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2049possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2050is currently displayed in some window.
2051
3c30cb6e
DL
2052** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2053argument function's results.
2054
62f20204
GM
2055** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2056signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2057
c0510d27 2058** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2059header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2060
2061** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2062ignores differences in case and text representation.
2063
2064** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2065cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2066as follows:
2067
2068 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2069 nil don't display a cursor
2070 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2071 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2072 others display a box cursor.
2073
9a0dd3dc
GM
2074** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2075an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2076defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2077set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2078
d7b511c4 2079** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2080specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2081the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2082text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2083
2084Example:
2085
2086 (string-to-syntax "()")
2087 => (4 . 41)
2088
1fa28578
GM
2089** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2090other than 10.
2091
2092*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2093INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2094
5d94f558 2095 #b1111
1fa28578 2096 => 15
5d94f558 2097 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2098 => -15
2099
2100*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2101
5d94f558 2102 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2103 => 438
2104
2105*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2106
5d94f558 2107 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2108 => 48815
2109
2110*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2111
5d94f558 2112 #2R-111
1fa28578 2113 => -7
5d94f558 2114 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2115 => 267
2116
3d4ff2dd 2117** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2118the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2119and isn't a string.
2120
3d4ff2dd
GM
2121** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2122a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2123value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2124not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2125
16ce590d
DL
2126+++
2127** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2128
73825616 2129** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2130for a regexp in a string.
2131
2132** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2133`mouse-position-function'.
2134
723e779c
GM
2135** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2136that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2137
d1e103b2
GM
2138** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2139Keywords are now always considered constants.
2140
31047e0d
DL
2141+++
2142** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2143returns it.
2144
7a85e4df
GM
2145** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2146returned by function `recent-keys'.
2147
02b14400
RS
2148+++
2149** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2150can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2151Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2152etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2153mode.
404fa7d6 2154
02b14400 2155+++
8964fec7
SM
2156** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2157and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2158
02b14400
RS
2159+++
2160** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2161has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2162function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2163returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2164been performed."
2165
2166When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2167and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2168hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2169then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2170
02b14400 2171+++
81da8b32
GM
2172** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2173In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2174and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2175
02b14400 2176+++
9e207b90
GM
2177** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2178with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2179specified table.
2180
2181 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2182
2183Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2184TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2185saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2186what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2187
02b14400 2188+++
d7f89643 2189** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2190Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2191
02b14400 2192+++
dde9e75a
GM
2193** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2194removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2195
02b14400 2196+++
9da30515
GM
2197** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2198instead of being optional.
2199
02b14400 2200+++
d20679eb
GM
2201** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2202modify read-only text.
2203
02b14400 2204+++
fbc164de
PE
2205** New functions and variables for locales.
2206
2207The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2208decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2209time functions like strftime. The new variables
2210`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2211locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2212
2213The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2214environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2215the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2216environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2217not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2218`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2219`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2220
02b14400 2221+++
863476d1
SM
2222** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2223To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2224modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2225start sequences.
2226
02b14400 2227+++
ef6d912c
GM
2228** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2229because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2230
02b14400 2231+++
a933dad1
DL
2232** New function `propertize'
2233
2234The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2235strings with text properties.
2236
2237- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2238
2239Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2240by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2241PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2242specified value of that property. Example:
2243
2244 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2245
2246+++
2247** push and pop macros.
2248
02b14400
RS
2249Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2250are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2251as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2252
2253(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2254(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2255 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2256
02b14400
RS
2257** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2258
6c7fd5aa
RS
2259Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2260are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2261
2262(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2263 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2264 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2265 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2266
2267(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2268 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2269 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2270 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2271
a933dad1
DL
2272+++
2273** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2274as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2275
2276[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2277[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2278[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2279[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2280[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2281 space, and DEL.
2282[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2283 and DEL.
2284[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2285 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2286 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2287[:alpha:] matches letters.
2288 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2289 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2290[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2291[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2292[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2293[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2294 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2295 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2296[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2297[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2298[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2299
2300+++
2301** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2302
2303The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2304
2305- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2306
2307The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2308are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2309
2310:test TEST
2311
2312TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2313Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2314it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2315
2316:size SIZE
2317
2318SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2319many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2320
2321:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2322
2323REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2324full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2325size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
23261.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2327old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2328
2329:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2330
2331THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2332hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2333(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2334
2335:weakness WEAK
2336
b548072f
GM
2337WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2338`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2339`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2340collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2341outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2342
2343- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2344
2345Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2346
2347- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2348
2349Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2350
2351- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2352
2353Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2354values are shared.
2355
2356- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2357
2358Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2359
2360- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2361
2362Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2363
2364- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2365
2366Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2367
2368- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2369
2370Returns the size of TABLE.
2371
d96d6bb0 2372- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2373
2374Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2375
2376- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2377
2378Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2379
2380- Function: clrhash TABLE
2381
2382Clear TABLE.
2383
2384- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2385
2386Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2387not found.
2388
79214ddf 2389- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2390
2391Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2392another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2393
2394- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2395
2396Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2397
2398- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2399
2400Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2401arguments KEY and VALUE.
2402
2403- Function: sxhash OBJ
2404
2405Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2406
2407- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2408
2409Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2410a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2411comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2412and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2413of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2414
2415TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2416
2417HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2418code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2419integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2420
2421Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2422be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2423
2424 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2425 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2426
2427 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2428 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2429
79214ddf 2430 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2431 'case-fold-string-hash))
2432
2433 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2434
2435+++
2436** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2437
2438It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2439circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2440a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2441
2442+++
2443** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2444
2445If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2446#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2447
a933dad1
DL
2448+++
2449** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2450t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2451specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2452is too short to reach that column.
2453
2454+++
2455** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2456now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2457after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2458two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2459
2460If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2461perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2462and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2463
2464+++
2465** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2466to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2467
2468+++
2469** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2470calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2471
2472+++
2473** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2474directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2475small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2476small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2477temporary-file-directory instead.
2478
2479+++
2480** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2481the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2482`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2483hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2484
2485+++
2486** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2487elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2488
2489+++
2490** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2491
2492make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2493creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2494ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2495
2496+++
2497** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2498
2499The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2500on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2501is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2502never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2503ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2504overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2505
2506If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2507that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2508to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2509The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2510
2511+++
2512** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2513
2514Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2515If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2516ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2517result string.
2518
2519Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2520string where arguments appear in the result string.
2521
2522Example:
2523
2524 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2525 (s2 "world"))
2526 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2527 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2528 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2529
2530results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2531
2532+++
2533** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2534
2535Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2536The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2537argument in it.
2538
2539 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2540 (arg "world"))
2541 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2542 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2543 (message msg arg))
2544
2545+++
2546** Sound support
2547
2548Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2549(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2550
2551Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2552(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2553to enable sound support.
2554
2555Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2556list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2557when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2558functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2559sound to play, before playing the sound.
2560
2561The following sound properties are supported:
2562
2563- `:file FILE'
2564
2565FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2566searched relative to `data-directory'.
2567
6fb40beb
GM
2568- `:data DATA'
2569
2570DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2571may be present, but not both.
2572
a933dad1
DL
2573- `:volume VOLUME'
2574
2575VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
25760..1. This property is optional.
2577
2578Other properties are ignored.
2579
2580** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2581
2582** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2583a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2584
2585** Changes to garbage collection
2586
2587*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2588of live and free strings.
2589
2590*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2591strings that have been consed so far.
2592
a933dad1 2593\f
04545643
GM
2594* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2595Lisp Manual
2596
82a452c8
GM
2597*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2598
9a8d84ca
DL
2599+++
2600** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2601
2602** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2603image.
2604
2605- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2606
2607Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2608
2609SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2610measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2611character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2612font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2613FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2614
ebb8f116
GM
2615** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2616has a mask bitmap.
2617
2618- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2619
2620Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2621FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2622or omitted means use the selected frame.
2623
f6499c03 2624+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2625** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2626satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2627
2628+++
2629** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2630optional.
2631
f6499c03
DL
2632+++
2633** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2634below).
04545643
GM
2635
2636\f
a933dad1
DL
2637* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2638
2639Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2640--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2641When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2642so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2643
f6d3257b
GM
2644** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2645to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2646
2647Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2648text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2649is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2650your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2651laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2652just display it black instead.
2653
2654This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2655a line like
2656
2657 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2658
2659in your `.emacs'.
2660
a933dad1
DL
2661** New face implementation.
2662
2663Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2664font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2665
2666+++
2667*** New faces.
2668
2669Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2670
2671 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2672
a933dad1
DL
2673 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2674 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2675
a933dad1 2676 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2677
a933dad1 2678 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2679
a933dad1 2680 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2681
a933dad1 2682 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2683
a933dad1
DL
2684 7. Background color.
2685
2686 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2687
2688 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2689
2690 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2691
2692 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2693
2694 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2695 color.
2696
2697 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2698 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2699
2700Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2701same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2702frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2703faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2704with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2705attributes mentioned above.
2706
2707There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2708definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2709created frames.
79214ddf 2710
a933dad1
DL
2711A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2712have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2713`fully-specified'.
2714
2715+++
2716*** Face merging.
2717
2718The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2719combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2720aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2721properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2722that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2723results in a fully-specified face.
2724
2725+++
2726*** Face realization.
2727
2728After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2729merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2730realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2731available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2732face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2733cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2734
2735Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2736character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2737for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2738charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2739
2740Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2741specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2742being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2743the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2744statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2745
2746In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2747`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
27480x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2749the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2750initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2751Emacs.
2752
2753Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2754`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2755registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2756with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2757
2758++++
2759**** Clearing face caches.
2760
2761The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2762on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2763unused fonts.
2764
2765+++
2766*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2767
a933dad1
DL
2768Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2769given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2770for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2771
2772If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2773pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2774family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2775property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2776an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2777
2778Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2779against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2780match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2781
2782Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2783
2784The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2785attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2786face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2787names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2788that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2789width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2790to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2791
2792Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2793specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2794face doesn't exist.
2795
2796+++
2797**** Scalable fonts
2798
2799Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2800since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2801servers.
2802
2803To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2804`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2805scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2806Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2807scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2808that list. Example:
2809
2810 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2811
2812allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2813
2814+++
2815*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2816
2817- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2818
2819Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2820is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2821string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2822
2823If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2824the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2825FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2826POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2827SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2828These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2829if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2830REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2831the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2832of the face font sort order.
2833
79214ddf 2834- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2835
2836Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2837omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2838(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2839non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2840
2841- Variable: font-list-limit
2842
2843Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2844won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2845matching font. The default is currently 100.
2846
2847+++
2848*** Setting face attributes.
2849
2850For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2851with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2852implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2853`face-attribute'.
2854
2855Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2856symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2857
2858The following attributes are recognized:
2859
2860`:family'
2861
2862VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2863or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2864and `?' are allowed.
2865
2866`:width'
2867
2868VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2869It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2870`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2871`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2872
2873`:height'
2874
787345ff
MB
2875VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2876in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2877scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2878height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2879
2880`:weight'
2881
2882VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2883symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2884`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2885
2886`:slant'
2887
2888VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2889symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2890`reverse-oblique'.
2891
2892`:foreground', `:background'
2893
2894VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2895
2896`:underline'
2897
2898VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2899VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2900a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2901don't underline.
2902
2903`:overline'
2904
2905VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2906VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2907string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2908overline.
2909
2910`:strike-through'
2911
2912VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2913striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2914face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2915is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2916
2917`:box'
2918
2919VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2920around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2921VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2922of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2923and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2924VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2925:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2926the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2927specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2928defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2929the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2930color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2931should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2932like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2933that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2934the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2935box.
2936
2937`:inverse-video'
2938
2939VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2940inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2941
2942`:stipple'
2943
2944If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2945The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2946searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2947HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2948is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2949explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2950
2951For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2952and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2953
2954`:font'
2955
2956Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2957XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2958is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2959versions of Emacs.
2960
2961For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2962be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2963must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2964
2965Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2966`defface'.
2967
787345ff
MB
2968`:inherit'
2969
2970VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
2971of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
2972like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
2973
a933dad1
DL
2974*** Face attributes and X resources
2975
2976The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2977from X resources:
2978
2979 Face attribute X resource class
2980-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2981 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2982 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2983 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2984 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2985 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2986 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2987 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2988 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2989 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2990 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2991 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2992 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2993 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2994 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2995 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2996 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2997 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2998 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2999 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3000
3001+++
3002*** Text property `face'.
3003
3004The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3005specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3006specification can be
3007
30081. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3009
30102. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3011 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3012 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3013 for face attribute names.
3014
30153. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3016 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3017 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3018
3019+++
3020** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3021
acf3ecb7
EZ
3022The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3023on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3024the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3025default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3026`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3027used to clear the mapping table.
3028
acf3ecb7
EZ
3029** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3030
3031The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3032and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3033type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3034color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3035display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3036old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3037`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3038compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3039should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3040modify their color-related behavior.
3041
3042The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3043any frame type.
3044
8a5719f0
EZ
3045** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3046
3047The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3048`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3049`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3050`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3051`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3052`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3053display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3054the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3055platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3056
a933dad1
DL
3057+++
3058** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3059
463cac2d 3060This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3061
3062The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3063end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3064Otherwise, it returns zero.
3065
463cac2d
GM
3066** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3067
3068There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3069buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3070property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3071
9a9dfda8 3072Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3073forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3074to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3075not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3076commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3077boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3078`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3079functions.
463cac2d
GM
3080
3081Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3082a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3083editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3084
9a9dfda8
GM
3085The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3086
59927f88 3087- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3088
3089Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3090
9a9dfda8
GM
3091A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3092If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3093constrained position if that is is different.
3094
3095If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3096positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3097ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3098constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3099as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3100is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3101fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3102the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3103also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3104
3105If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3106NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3107unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3108C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3109only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3110
59927f88
MB
3111If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3112a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3113
3114Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3115
3116- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3117
59927f88 3118Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3119A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3120If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3121
3122- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3123
3124Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3125A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3126If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3127If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3128field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3129
3130- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3131
3132Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3133A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3134If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3135If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3136then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3137
3138- Function: field-string &optional POS
3139
3140Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3141A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3142If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3143
3144- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3145
3146Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3147A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3148If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3149
a933dad1
DL
3150+++
3151** Image support.
3152
3153Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3154strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3155(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3156replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3157
3158If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3159`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3160AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3161window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3162area.
3163
3164IMAGE is an image specification.
3165
3166*** Image specifications
3167
3168Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3169is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3170specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3171symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3172described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3173
3174The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3175
3176`:ascent ASCENT'
3177
576da55d
GM
3178ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3179If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3180to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3181
3182If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3183image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3184
5d94f558 3185If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3186centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3187of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3188overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3189
3190`:margin MARGIN'
3191
79214ddf 3192MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3193margin around the image. Default is 0.
3194
3195`:relief RELIEF'
3196
3197RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3198around an image.
3199
3200`:algorithm ALGO'
3201
47e351a3
GM
3202Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3203
3204ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3205edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3206
3207ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3208apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3209nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3210position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3211around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3212neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3213transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3214x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3215below.
3216
3217 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3218 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3219 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3220
3221The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3222resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3223multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3224of the factors' absolute values.
3225
327652be 3226Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3227
47e351a3
GM
3228 (1 0 0
3229 0 0 0
3230 9 9 -1)
3231
3232Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3233
3234 ( 2 -1 0
3235 -1 0 1
3236 0 1 -2)
3237
ba9eeda1
GM
3238ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3239``disabled''.
3240
47e351a3
GM
3241`:mask MASK'
3242
3243If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3244the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3245image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3246background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3247image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3248the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3249GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3250image.
a933dad1 3251
47e351a3
GM
3252If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3253in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3254`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3255
3256`:file FILE'
3257
3258Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3259search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3260building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3261may be present in the image specification.
3262
518df5c4
GM
3263`:data DATA'
3264
3265Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3266supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3267present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3268support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3269
a933dad1
DL
3270*** Supported image types
3271
b246b1f6 3272**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3273
3274XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3275properties supported are
3276
3277`:foreground FG'
3278
3279FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3280is the frame's foreground.
3281
3282`:background FG'
3283
3284BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3285the frame's background color.
3286
3287XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3288case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3289instead of a `:file' property.
3290
3291`:width WIDTH'
3292
3293WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3294
3295`:height HEIGHT'
3296
3297HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3298
3299`:data DATA'
3300
3301DATA must be either
3302
3303 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3304 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3305
3306 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3307
3308 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3309 bitmap.
3310
c76e04a8
GM
3311 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3312 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3313 in the file.
3314
a933dad1
DL
3315**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3316
3317XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3318`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3319found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3320`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3321
3322Additional image properties supported are:
3323
3324`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3325
3326SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3327name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3328name.
3329
3330XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3331add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3332
a933dad1
DL
3333The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3334to display compressed images.
3335
3336**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3337
3338PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3339mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3340defined.
3341
3342**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3343
3344Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3345package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3346are:
3347
a933dad1
DL
3348**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3349
3350Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3351package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3352properties defined.
3353
3354**** GIF, image type `gif'
3355
3356Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3357`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3358
3359Additional image properties supported are:
3360
3361`:index INDEX'
3362
3363INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3364multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3365
3366This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3367For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3368at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3369every 0.1 seconds.
3370
3371(defun show-anim (file max)
3372 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3373 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3374
3375(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3376 (when (= idx max)
3377 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3378 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3379 (save-excursion
3380 (set-buffer buffer)
3381 (goto-char (point-min))
3382 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3383 (insert-image img "x"))
3384 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3385
3386**** PNG, image type `png'
3387
3388Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3389package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3390properties defined.
3391
3392**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3393
3394Additional image properties supported are:
3395
3396`:pt-width WIDTH'
3397
3398WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3399integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3400
3401`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3402
3403HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3404must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3405
3406`:bounding-box BOX'
3407
3408BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3409the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3410files. This is an required property.
3411
3412Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3413lisp/gs.el.
3414
3415*** Lisp interface.
3416
79214ddf
FP
3417The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3418which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3419
3420Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3421they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3422The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3423manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3424images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3425
3426*** Simplified image API, image.el
3427
3428The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3429creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3430can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3431define an image based on available image types. The functions
3432`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3433buffer.
3434
3435+++
3436** Display margins.
3437
3438Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3439and images.
3440
3441To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3442`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3443`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3444obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3445`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3446the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3447of the display margins.
3448
3449You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3450containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3451one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3452string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3453in this file).
3454
3455+++
3456** Help display
3457
3458Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3459moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3460`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3461that have a `help-echo' property.
3462
9662da0b 3463If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3464is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3465the window in which the help was found.
3466
3467If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3468`help-echo' text property was found.
3469
3470If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3471POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3472
3473If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3474the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3475mouse.
d5aa31d8 3476
9662da0b
GM
3477If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3478string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3479
3480For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3481determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3482property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3483For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3484used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3485
3486The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3487the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3488causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3489
3490+++
3491** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3492
3493The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3494This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3495
3496The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3497scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3498The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3499scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3500used.
3501
79214ddf
FP
3502 (global-set-key [A-down]
3503 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3504 (interactive)
79214ddf 3505 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3506 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3507 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3508 #'(lambda ()
3509 (interactive)
79214ddf 3510 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3511 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3512
3513+++
3514** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3515
3516Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3517when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3518variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3519is called with one argument, POS.
3520
3521At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3522characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3523as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3524property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3525`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3526
3527+++
3528** Tool bar support.
3529
3530Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3531parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3532controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3533suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3534`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3535automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3536
3537*** Tool bar item definitions
3538
3539Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3540`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3541where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3542
a933dad1
DL
3543CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3544evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3545the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3546property (see below).
79214ddf 3547
a933dad1
DL
3548BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3549binding are currently ignored.
3550
3551The following properties are recognized:
3552
3553`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3554
a933dad1
DL
3555FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3556or disabled.
79214ddf 3557
a933dad1 3558`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3559
a933dad1 3560FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3561
a933dad1
DL
3562`:filter FUNCTION'
3563
3564FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3565FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3566used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3567
a933dad1
DL
3568`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3569
3570TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3571and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3572
a933dad1
DL
3573`:image IMAGES'
3574
3575IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3576image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3577meaning of each of the four elements:
3578
3579 Index Use when item is
3580 ----------------------------------------
3581 0 enabled and selected
3582 1 enabled and deselected
3583 2 disabled and selected
3584 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3585
4ba7246d
GM
3586If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3587algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3588
a933dad1 3589`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3590
a933dad1
DL
3591Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3592is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3593
dab96841 3594The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3595toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3596to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3597menu bar.
dab96841 3598
a933dad1
DL
3599*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3600
3601If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3602resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3603than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3604
79214ddf 3605If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3606raised when the mouse moves over them.
3607
3608You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3609`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3610pixels. Default is 1.
3611
3612You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3613`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3614
3615*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3616
3617You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3618a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3619
3620 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3621 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3622 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3623
3624is the original tool bar item definition, then
3625
3626 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3627
3628makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3629item.
3630
3631** Mode line changes.
3632
3633+++
3634*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3635
3636The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3637that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3638a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3639
36401. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3641a `local-map' text property.
3642
36432. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3644that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3645
36463. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3647is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3648`local-map' property.
3649
3650The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3651properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3652example.
3653
54522c9f
GM
3654*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3655evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3656
a933dad1
DL
3657+++
3658*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3659variable mode-line-format to nil.
3660
3661+++
3662*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3663
3664This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3665`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3666completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3667`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3668line.
3669
3670The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3671`header-line'.
3672
3673The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3674position in the header-line.
3675
3676+++
3677** Text property `display'
3678
623a0aae
GM
3679The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3680replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3681also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3682the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3683below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3684
623a0aae
GM
3685*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3686
3687To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3688text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3689
3690If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3691marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3692the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3693is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3694simpler form STRING as property value.
3695
a933dad1
DL
3696*** Variable width and height spaces
3697
3698To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3699specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3700`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3701area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3702marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3703displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3704simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3705
3706The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3707PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3708properties described below.
3709
3710The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3711characters having the `display' property.
3712
3713- :width WIDTH
3714
3715Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3716character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3717
3718- :relative-width FACTOR
3719
3720Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3721first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3722same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3723width of that character by FACTOR.
3724
3725- :align-to HPOS
3726
3727Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3728value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3729
3730Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3731
3732- :height HEIGHT
3733
3734Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3735normal line height.
3736
3737- :relative-height FACTOR
3738
3739The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3740of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3741
3742- :ascent ASCENT
3743
3744Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3745used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3746baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3747equal to 100.
3748
3749You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3750
3751*** Images
3752
3753A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3754. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3755in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3756their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3757the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3758`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3759area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3760the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3761as display specification.
3762
3763*** Other display properties
3764
3765- :space-width FACTOR
3766
3767Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3768should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3769integer or float.
3770
3771- :height HEIGHT
3772
3773Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3774
3775If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3776means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3777the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3778``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3779a font is available counts as a step.
3780
3781If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3782as tall as the frame's default font.
3783
3784If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3785height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3786
3787Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3788`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3789
3790- :raise FACTOR
3791
3792FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3793font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3794raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3795amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3796`:height' subproperty.
3797
3798*** Conditional display properties
3799
3800All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3801has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3802applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3803During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3804the text having the `display' property.
3805
3806The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3807`(:when t SPEC)'.
3808
3809+++
3810** New menu separator types.
3811
3812Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3813item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3814treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3815to specify other menu separator types.
3816
3817- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3818
3819No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3820separator occurs.
3821
3822- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3823
3824A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3825
3826- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3827
3828A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3829
3830- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3831
3832A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3833
3834- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3835
3836A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3837
3838- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3839
3840A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3841displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3842
3843- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3844
3845A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3846
3847- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3848
3849A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3850
3851- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3852
3853A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3854
3855- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3856
3857Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3858
3859- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3860
3861Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3862
3863- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3864
3865Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3866
3867- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3868
3869Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3870
3871Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3872the corresponding single-line separators.
3873
3874+++
3875** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3876
3877The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3878`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3879Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3880that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3881default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3882default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3883default foreground is black.
3884
3885The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3886(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3887`ScrollBarBackground').
3888
3889Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3890settings for scroll bar colors.
3891
3892+++
3893** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3894display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3895
3896---
3897** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3898starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3899on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3900line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3901the original window start.
3902
3903---
3904** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3905`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3906now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3907
3908+++
3909** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3910
3911A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3912`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3913windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3914other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3915
3916The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3917fixed-width and fixed-height.
3918
3919 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3920
3921A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3922fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3923window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3924change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3925temporarily to nil, for example
3926
3927 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3928 (enlarge-window 10))
3929
79214ddf 3930Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3931or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3932
3933** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3934terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3935to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3936overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3937horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3938support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3939
3787e12e
GM
3940
3941^L
3942* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3943
3944** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3945input.
3946
3947** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3948
3949** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3950
3951** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3952only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3953exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3954(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3955(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3956
3957** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3958been added.
3959
3960^L
3961* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3962
3963** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3964
3965^L
3966* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3967
3968** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3969M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3970\f
3971* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3972
3973** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3974
3975You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3976Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3977`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3978
3979If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3980is the one that is used.
3981
3982** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3983the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3984Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3985separate from the command's regular output.
3986Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3987says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3988In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3989the buffer name.
3990
3991When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3992output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3993it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3994cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3995
3996** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3997the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3998is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3999created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4000
4001** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4002example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4003match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4004quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4005
4006** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4007now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4008if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4009they never ignore case.
4010
4011** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4012under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4013applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4014of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4015just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4016convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4017part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4018
4019If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4020the same format that was used in the file before.
4021
4022You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4023`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4024
4025** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4026renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4027This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4028
4029** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4030The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4031buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4032your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4033is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4034end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4035Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4036
4037The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4038eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4039control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4040format. You can now customize these variables.
4041
4042** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4043filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4044filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4045enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4046
4047** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4048in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4049windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4050
4051** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4052dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4053doesn't have any effect.
4054
4055** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4056not one per buffer.
4057
4058** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4059use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4060 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4061
4062** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4063To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4064`auto-show-mode' command.
4065
4066** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4067avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4068versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4069choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4070occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4071
4072** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4073cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4074
4075** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4076character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4077feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4078
4079** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4080the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4081interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4082and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4083
4084** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4085
4086The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4087that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4088one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4089codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4090set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4091
4092Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4093from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4094
4095IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4096equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4097a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4098`?' on other systems.
4099
4100IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4101feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4102Unix.
4103
4104Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4105current codepage when it starts.
4106
4107** Mail changes
4108
4109*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4110`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4111appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4112non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4113MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4114headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4115latin-1:
4116
4117 MIME-version: 1.0
4118 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4119 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4120
4121*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4122default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4123default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4124sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4125buffer-file-coding-system.
4126
4127You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4128sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4129mail.
4130
4131*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4132if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4133Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4134list of possible coding systems.
4135
4136** CC Mode changes
4137
4138*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4139modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4140longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4141docstring for details.
4142
4143*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4144symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4145found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4146prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4147lineup functions use this feature currently.
4148
4149*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4150"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4151
4152*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4153"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4154
4155*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4156from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4157symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4158c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4159anonymous classes.
4160
4161*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4162syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4163
4164*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4165inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4166support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4167function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4168
4169*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4170(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4171brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4172c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4173(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4174
4175*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4176
4177*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4178
4179*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4180for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4181
4182*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4183
4184*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4185associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4186This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4187circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4188class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4189
4190** Gnus changes.
4191
4192*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4193added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4194Gnus manual for the full story.
4195
4196*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4197before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4198group, which is created automatically.
4199
4200*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4201values.
4202
4203*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4204
4205*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4206outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4207
4208*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4209`C-u C-c C-c'.
4210
4211*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4212
4213*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4214re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4215
4216*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4217
4218*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4219Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4220
4221*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4222`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4223
4224*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4225control over simplification.
4226
4227*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4228
4229*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4230limit.
4231
4232*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4233
4234*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4235
4236*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4237If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4238rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4239
4240*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4241`a' forces normal posting method.
4242
4243*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4244-- `W d'.
4245
4246*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4247to a non-nil value.
4248
4249*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4250where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4251
4252*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4253has been added.
4254
4255*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4256
4257*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4258
4259*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4260`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4261
4262*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4263`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4264
4265*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4266
4267*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4268been added.
4269
4270*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4271`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4272
4273*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4274updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4275
4276*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4277
4278*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4279
4280*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4281
4282** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4283
4284*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4285options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4286nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4287
4288*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4289TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4290of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4291TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4292can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4293
4294*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4295All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4296but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4297the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4298
4299*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4300the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4301buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4302mismatch.
4303
4304** Changes to RefTeX mode
4305
4306*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4307file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4308
4309*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4310lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4311characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4312removed from the label.
4313
4314*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4315a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4316
4317*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4318customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4319
4320*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4321`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4322expressions.
4323
4324*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4325
4326** New/deleted modes and packages
4327
4328*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4329SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4330
4331*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4332editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4333SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4334
4335*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4336changes with a special face.
4337
4338*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4339this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4340Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4341\f
4342* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4343
4344** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4345This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4346conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4347and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4348check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4349
4350The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4351Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4352distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4353
4354** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4355MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4356controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4357directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4358Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4359on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4360string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4361program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4362printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4363
4364** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4365output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4366available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4367input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4368temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4369program.
4370
4371An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4372and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4373programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4374automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4375as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4376ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4377
4378** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4379a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4380MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4381was not documented clearly before.
4382
4383** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4384This includes Tetris and Snake.
4385\f
4386* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4387
4388** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4389return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4390They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4391meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4392
4393** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4394WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4395and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4396
4397** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4398
4399*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4400It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4401
4402*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4403the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4404integers.
4405
4406** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4407files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4408arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4409file names and attributes are returned.
4410
4411** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4412sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4413accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4414It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4415returns the result.
4416
4417** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4418to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4419
4420** New functions for base64 conversion:
4421
4422The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4423into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4424performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4425optionally.
4426
4427Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4428job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4429
4430**
4431The new function process-running-child-p
4432will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4433terminal to its own child process.
4434
4435** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4436when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4437to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4438itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4439
4440** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4441be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4442
4443** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4444:included is an alias for :visible.
4445
4446easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4447easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4448to move or copy menu entries.
4449
4450** Multibyte editing changes
4451
4452*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4453an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4454make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4455work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4456char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4457 (setq char (sref str idx)
4458 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4459The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4460
4461If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4462(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4463 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4464
4465*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4466region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4467deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4468
4469 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4470
4471This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4472across the boundary.
4473
4474*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4475`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4476 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4477 contains 8-bit characters.
4478 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4479 contains invalid characters.
4480
4481*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4482text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4483preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4484text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4485way.
4486
4487*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4488If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4489end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4490prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4491
4492*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4493compose Thai characters in a string.
4494
4495** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4496argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4497for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4498menus should always use the third argument.
4499
4500** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4501read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4502arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4503input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4504
4505** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4506of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4507programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4508inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4509
4510** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4511the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4512returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4513echo area contents.
4514
4515 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4516
4517** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4518NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4519requested feature cannot be loaded.
4520
4521** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4522foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4523means to clear out that attribute.
4524
4525** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4526gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4527
4528** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4529read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4530unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4531end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4532
4533** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4534the gap of the current buffer.
4535
4536** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4537to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4538current buffer.
4539
4540** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4541facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4542These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4543it back in after any modifications have been made.
4544\f
4545* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4546
4547** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4548the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4549/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4550directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4551subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4552
4553Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4554names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4555Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4556which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4557these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4558
4559Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4560starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4561time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4562
4563This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4564Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4565to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4566subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4567`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4568results.
4569
4570** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4571GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4572that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4573fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4574\f
4575* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4576
4577** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4578including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4579it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4580perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4581
4582** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4583specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4584region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4585further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4586command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4587within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4588are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4589region.
4590
4591In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4592selective undo.
4593
4594** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4595unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4596buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4597effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4598Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4599
4600The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4601though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4602-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4603load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4604
4605** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4606no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4607enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4608something that most users not do.
4609
4610** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4611operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4612The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4613applications.
4614
4615C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4616pasting operations.
4617
4618** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4619setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4620like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4621printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4622`ps-printer-name'.
4623
4624** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4625minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4626any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4627except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4628incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4629hits a new word.
4630
4631Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4632Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4633to be confused by TeX commands.
4634
4635You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4636correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4637clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4638of various alternative replacements and actions.
4639
4640Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4641the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4642corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4643alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4644flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4645
4646Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4647flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4648
4649** Changes in input method usage.
4650
4651Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4652the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4653respectively.
4654
4655You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4656
4657If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4658of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4659
4660The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4661that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4662
4663 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4664
4665 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4666
4667 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4668 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4669
4670 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4671 given in the following case:
4672 o When you are using a complex input method.
4673 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4674
4675If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4676input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4677and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4678setting it to t is helpful.
4679
4680The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4681
4682In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4683keys:
4684 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4685 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4686 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4687These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4688environment.
4689
4690** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4691names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4692minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4693get
4694
4695 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4696
4697which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4698
4699Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4700Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4701
4702** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4703at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4704its owner and group.
4705
4706** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4707Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4708
4709** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4710contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4711
4712** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4713which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4714in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4715by the left edge of the rectangle.
4716
4717** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4718increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4719C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4720for writing keyboard macros.
4721
4722** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4723files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4724frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4725the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4726additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4727info.
4728
4729** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4730
4731** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4732query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4733contents only.
4734
4735** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4736confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4737the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4738says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4739
4740** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4741non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4742literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4743
4744** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4745now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4746Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4747inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4748
4749** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4750failure if the command produces no output.
4751
4752** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4753manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4754the mouse.
4755
4756** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4757mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4758function and variable names.
4759
4760** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4761reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4762file-coding-system-alist.
4763
4764** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4765t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4766converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4767the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4768according to the current fontset.
4769
4770** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4771
4772The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4773that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4774nonascii-insert-offset.
4775
4776For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4777enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4778nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4779characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4780
4781** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4782an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4783
4784** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4785letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4786
4787** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4788are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4789command keys.
4790
4791** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4792user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4793
4794Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4795user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4796all variables that have documentation.
4797
4798** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4799shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4800that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4801minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4802it should show; the default is 20.
4803
4804Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4805the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4806of your input.
4807
4808** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4809all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4810recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4811argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4812the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4813Newly added options are included as well.
4814
4815If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4816then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4817for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4818
4819This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4820Customize menu.
4821
4822** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4823the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4824
4825** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4826buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4827invoked.
4828
4829** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4830that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4831The default is 1.
4832
4833** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4834syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4835new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4836(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4837sensibly.
4838
4839** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4840
4841** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4842value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4843two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4844
4845** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4846reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4847for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4848every night.
4849
4850** Desktop changes
4851
4852*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4853the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4854
4855*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4856and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4857
4858** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4859read and post multi-lingual articles.
4860
4861** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4862doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4863be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4864outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4865the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4866made invisible again.
4867
4868** Mail reading and sending changes
4869
4870*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4871the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4872changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4873toggle.
4874
4875*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4876now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4877summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4878the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4879rmail-default-body-file.
4880
4881*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4882longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4883handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4884
4885*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4886it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4887is evaluated to insert the signature.
4888
4889*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4890outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4891handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4892putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4893transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4894especially interested in trying feedmail.
4895
4896feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4897feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4898provided by feedmail are:
4899
4900**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4901stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4902there is also a queue for draft messages
4903
4904**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4905be prompted for confirmation
4906
4907**** does smart filling of address headers
4908
4909**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4910the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4911can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4912
4913**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4914the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4915/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4916function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4917
4918** Dired changes
4919
4920*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4921files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4922
4923*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4924run Dired on the directory name at point.
4925
4926*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4927files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4928for a specified regexp.
4929
4930** VC Changes
4931
4932*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4933conveniently.
4934
4935*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4936faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4937Dired.
4938
4939VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4940directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4941listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4942currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4943
4944You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4945then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4946vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4947control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4948on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4949
4950All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4951is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4952`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4953the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4954`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4955
4956The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4957toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4958VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4959`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4960
4961Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4962ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4963command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4964
4965*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4966file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4967session to resolve them.
4968
4969Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4970resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4971contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4972uses as well).
4973
4974*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4975command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4976you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4977either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4978branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4979If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4980using ediff.
4981
4982** Changes in Font Lock
4983
4984*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4985are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4986use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4987unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4988compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4989
4990** Frame name display changes
4991
4992*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4993frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4994raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4995when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4996
4997*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4998frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4999menu.
5000
5001** Comint (subshell) changes
5002
5003*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5004subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5005with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5006
5007*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5008
5009C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5010that is, the line after the last line you got.
5011You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5012
5013C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5014send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5015the following line.
5016
5017C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5018which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5019previously sent input.
5020
5021C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5022it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5023as the search string.
5024
5025*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5026automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5027
5028** C mode changes
5029
5030*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5031and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5032assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5033definition.
5034
5035*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5036(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5037Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5038style is still the default however.
5039
5040*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5041
5042*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5043are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5044them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5045
5046*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5047and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5048
5049*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5050namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5051
5052*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5053makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5054
5055*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5056c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5057
5058*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5059should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5060package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5061variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5062
5063** Changes to hippie-expand.
5064
5065*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5066non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5067which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5068
5069*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5070non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5071expanding dynamically.
5072
5073*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5074non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5075
5076*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5077non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5078this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5079expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5080
5081*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5082
5083** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5084
5085*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5086bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5087automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5088bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5089against the first word in the title.
5090
5091*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5092capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5093bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5094lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5095lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5096bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5097
5098*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5099generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5100replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5101bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5102
5103** Changes in vcursor.el.
5104
5105*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5106and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5107variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5108entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5109`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5110in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5111
5112*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5113Editing group once the package is loaded.
5114
5115*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5116generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5117vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5118
5119*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5120vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5121
5122** Ispell changes.
5123
5124*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5125buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5126are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5127
5128*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5129A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5130and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5131defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5132include:
5133
5134 o URLs are automatically skipped
5135 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5136
5137*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5138
5139** Changes to RefTeX mode
5140
5141RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5142large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5143re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5144section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5145
5146*** New recursive parser.
5147
5148The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5149entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5150recursive parser scans the individual files.
5151
5152*** Parsing only part of a document.
5153
5154Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5155partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5156the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5157
5158 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5159
5160*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5161
5162This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5163
5164 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5165
5166*** Using multiple selection buffers
5167
5168If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5169for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5170
5171 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5172
5173*** References to external documents.
5174
5175The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5176documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5177documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5178macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5179RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5180the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5181The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5182
5183*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5184
5185The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5186and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5187
5188Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5189the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5190
5191*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5192
5193The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5194buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5195
5196*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5197
5198The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5199contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5200`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5201have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5202enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5203at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5204more.
5205
5206*** Support for the varioref package
5207
5208The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5209
5210*** New hooks
5211
5212Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5213and citations are created. These hooks are
5214`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5215`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5216
5217*** Citations outside LaTeX
5218
5219The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5220a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5221
5222*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5223
5224The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5225fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5226fontified, use
5227
5228 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5229
5230** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5231With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5232the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5233directories that contain the same file name.
5234
5235Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5236Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5237file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5238Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5239have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5240names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5241directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5242directory.
5243
5244** New modes and packages
5245
5246*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5247It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5248it, but some do not.
5249
5250*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5251code.
5252
5253*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5254current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5255around in a buffer.
5256
5257Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5258
5259*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5260uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5261be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5262established system of notation similar to Chess.
5263
5264*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5265documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5266guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5267
5268*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5269available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5270system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5271simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5272functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5273the like.
5274
5275*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5276identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5277
5278*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5279within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5280used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5281the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5282
5283*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5284
5285 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5286 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5287 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5288 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5289 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5290 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5291 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5292 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5293 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5294 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5295 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5296
5297 Platform-specific modes:
5298
5299 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5300 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5301 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5302 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5303 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5304 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5305 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5306 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5307 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5308\f
5309* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5310
5311** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5312use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5313That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5314Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5315
5316Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5317you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5318consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5319
5320** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5321and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5322specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5323searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5324
5325** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5326multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5327character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5328environment.
5329
5330** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5331take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5332string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5333current input method for reading this one event.
5334
5335** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5336now control whether to output certain characters as
5337backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5338non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5339characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5340in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5341\f
5342* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5343
5344** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5345of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5346
5347** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5348in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5349always increases point by 1.
5350
5351The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5352considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5353
5354See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5355
5356** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5357Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5358default value changed. For example,
5359
5360 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5361 :type 'integer
5362 :group 'foo
5363 :version "20.3")
5364
5365 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5366 :version "20.3")
5367
5368If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5369default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5370is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5371`:version' in the top level group.
5372
5373This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5374
5375** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5376starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5377
5378However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5379symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5380support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5381to themselves.
5382
5383If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5384this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5385values whatever.
5386
5387** There is a new debugger command, R.
5388It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5389in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5390
5391** Frame-local variables.
5392
5393You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5394the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5395local bindings for that variable.
5396
5397These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5398frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5399modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5400parameter name.
5401
5402Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5403Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5404active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5405that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5406
5407It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5408clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5409very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5410through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5411
5412** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5413"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5414evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5415makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5416See the documentation in sregex.el.
5417
5418** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5419is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5420parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5421The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5422
5423** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5424If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5425
5426** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5427known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5428define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5429
5430** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5431when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5432it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5433history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5434
5435The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5436return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5437empty input.
5438
5439** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5440for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5441`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5442Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5443`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5444
5445** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5446echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5447a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5448default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5449
5450** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5451specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5452function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5453place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5454non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5455
5456** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5457If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5458up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5459end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5460
5461** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5462which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5463If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5464
5465** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5466holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5467was directed to display this buffer.
5468
5469** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5470with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5471describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5472other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5473set-window-configuration.
5474
5475** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5476window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5477positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5478windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5479
5480** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5481override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5482look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5483
5484If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5485non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5486map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5487
5488minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5489and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5490
5491** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5492except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5493
5494** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5495USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5496floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5497
5498** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5499to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5500in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5501it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5502
5503** Menu changes
5504
5505*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5506keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5507better supported.
5508
5509The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5510a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5511you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5512can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5513then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5514
5515*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5516
5517In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5518 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5519defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5520starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5521
5522The format is:
5523 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5524 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5525where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5526string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5527The supported properties include
5528
5529:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5530 item is enabled.
5531:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5532 item should appear in the menu.
5533:filter FILTER-FN
5534 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5535 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5536 It should return a binding to use instead.
5537:keys DESCRIPTION
5538 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5539 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5540 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5541:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5542 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5543 keyboard binding.
5544:key-sequence nil
5545 This means that the command normally has no
5546 keyboard equivalent.
5547:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5548:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5549 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5550 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5551 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5552
5553Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5554Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5555
5556(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5557
5558** New event types
5559
5560*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5561mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5562corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5563which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5564
5565 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5566
5567where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5568same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5569indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5570negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5571the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5572forward, away from the user.
5573
5574As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5575
5576*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5577files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5578and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5579filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5580loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5581
5582 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5583
5584where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5585same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5586that were dragged and dropped.
5587
5588As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5589
5590** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5591
5592*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5593any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5594to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5595
5596*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5597can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5598that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5599
5600*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5601in Emacs 19 and before.
5602
5603The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5604The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5605
5606*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5607buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5608unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5609representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5610
5611This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5612as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5613viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5614one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5615will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5616
5617This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5618representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5619(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5620consistent with the new representation.
5621
5622*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5623representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5624about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5625however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5626
5627The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5628nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5629using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5630
5631*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5632representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5633representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5634
5635The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5636loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5637is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5638
5639*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5640which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5641
5642*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5643which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5644
5645*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5646portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5647so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5648You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5649
5650*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5651it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5652
5653*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5654convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5655buffer or string being searched.
5656
5657One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5658[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5659searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5660searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5661obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5662you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5663expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5664
5665*** Structure of coding system changed.
5666
5667All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5668by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5669which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5670as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5671vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5672your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5673define-coding-system-alias.
5674
5675The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5676the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5677access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5678pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5679character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5680safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5681'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5682`iso-8859-1'.
5683
5684Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5685The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5686coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5687(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5688
5689Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5690also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5691are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5692the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5693
5694*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5695proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5696This function requires a user interaction.
5697
5698*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5699find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5700select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5701systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5702a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5703select-safe-coding-system.
5704
5705*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5706decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5707last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5708was done.
5709
5710*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5711used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5712coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5713
5714*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5715return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5716characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5717`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5718
5719*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5720coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5721coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5722converted.
5723
5724*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5725coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5726
5727*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5728character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5729character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5730each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5731either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5732range of characters.
5733
5734*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5735Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5736
5737*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5738in the current buffer at position POS.
5739
5740*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5741input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5742function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5743character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5744event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5745binding input-method-function to nil.
5746
5747The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5748method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5749input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5750the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5751not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5752
5753The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5754subsequent events of a key sequence.
5755
5756*** You can customize any language environment by using
5757set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5758
5759The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5760customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5761instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5762environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5763exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5764\f
5765* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5766
5767** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5768options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5769at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5770tree structure.
5771
5772M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5773user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5774
5775With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5776session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5777in your .emacs file.)
5778
5779** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5780You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5781
5782** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5783This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5784
5785** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5786immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5787kills the region.
5788
5789The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5790delete the character before point, as usual.
5791
5792** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5793on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5794by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5795
5796** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5797insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5798the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5799onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5800history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5801past.)
5802
5803** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5804This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5805in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5806TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5807makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5808
5809As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5810and is an alias for it.
5811
5812If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5813use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5814
5815** Scrolling changes
5816
5817*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5818position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5819
5820In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5821on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5822where it started.
5823
5824*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5825move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5826screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5827does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5828
5829*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5830top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5831comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5832recenters the window.
5833
5834** International character set support (MULE)
5835
5836Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5837including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5838Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5839Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5840features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5841MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5842
5843Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5844coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5845character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5846variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5847into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5848
5849Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5850generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5851supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5852language, to make it possible to type them.
5853
5854The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5855character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5856
5857The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5858to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5859
5860You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5861
5862 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5863
5864Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5865characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5866argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5867already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5868characters for their work until they want to change.
5869
5870*** Input methods
5871
5872An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5873specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5874has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5875the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5876support several input methods.
5877
5878The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5879another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5880work.
5881
5882A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5883characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5884composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5885consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5886sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5887letter.
5888
5889The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5890by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5891First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5892marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5893mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5894
5895None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5896they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5897phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5898converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5899
5900Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5901word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5902typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5903the first guess is wrong.
5904
5905*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5906turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5907
5908If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5909byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5910they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5911the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5912
5913However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5914use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5915includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5916translate automatically to and from either one.
5917
5918*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5919
5920Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5921file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5922sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5923what you want.
5924
5925If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5926example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5927system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5928multibyte characters in that buffer.
5929
5930If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5931character conversion as well.
5932
5933*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5934
5935A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5936Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5937requires using many fonts.
5938
5939Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5940collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5941
5942A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5943the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5944have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5945you would use a font.
5946
5947If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5948specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5949display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5950
5951The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5952(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5953characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5954or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5955and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5956
5957*** Defining fontsets.
5958
5959Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5960chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5961with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5962
5963Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5964of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5965`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5966standard fontset are created automatically.
5967
5968If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5969argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5970FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5971with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5972name is `fontset-startup'.
5973
5974Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5975The resource value should have this form:
5976 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5977FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5978 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5979 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5980 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5981The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5982of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5983CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5984FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5985
5986Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5987last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5988You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5989
5990For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5991font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5992following resource,
5993 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5994the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5995 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5996Here is the substitution rule:
5997 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5998 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5999 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6000 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6001 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6002
6003The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6004fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6005that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6006
6007With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6008like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6009name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6010fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6011fontsets.
6012
6013*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6014defaults for a particular choice of language.
6015
6016Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6017method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6018visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6019already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6020language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6021system for new files that you create.
6022
6023It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6024set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6025whole Emacs session.
6026
6027For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6028chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6029with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6030
6031*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6032specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6033specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6034the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6035coding systems that Emacs supports.
6036
6037*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6038lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6039This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6040After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6041is used for *the immediately following command*.
6042
6043So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6044write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6045
6046If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6047then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6048
6049For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6050visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6051
6052*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6053construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6054to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6055specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6056of the file.
6057
6058*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6059the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6060code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6061translated into that character code.
6062
6063This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6064various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6065
6066By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6067
6068*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6069the coding system for keyboard input.
6070
6071Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6072with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6073some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6074
6075By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6076
6077Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6078input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6079translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6080to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6081designed to work with terminals.
6082
6083*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6084specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6085This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6086has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6087translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6088in the corresponding buffer.
6089
6090By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6091
6092*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6093to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6094It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6095
6096*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6097an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6098command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6099want to use.
6100
6101C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6102method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6103
6104*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6105layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6106remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6107which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6108
6109*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6110the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6111related information.
6112
6113*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6114HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6115scripts.
6116
6117*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6118information about the support for a particular language.
6119You specify the language as an argument.
6120
6121*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6122the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6123first dash.
6124
6125A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6126(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6127whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
61281 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6129
6130 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6131 B big5 (Chinese)
6132 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6133 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6134 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6135 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6136 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6137 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6138 K euc-korea (Korean)
6139 R koi8 (Russian)
6140 Q tibetan
6141 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6142 T lao
6143 T tis620 (Thai)
6144 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6145 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6146 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6147 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6148 z hz (Chinese)
6149
6150When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6151two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6152coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6153keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6154
6155*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6156conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6157
6158When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6159into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6160rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6161Rmail files themselves.
6162
6163*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6164conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6165
6166Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6167for sending mail:
6168
6169- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6170- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6171- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6172 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6173- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6174
6175*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6176to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6177Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6178translations.
6179
6180** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6181of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6182insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6183without any conversion.
6184
6185** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6186You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6187RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6188any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6189
6190** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6191functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6192
6193Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6194Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6195
6196Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6197mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6198
6199** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6200complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6201in the buffer before point.
6202
6203With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6204symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6205you are using.
6206
6207With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6208just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6209
6210** File locking works with NFS now.
6211
6212The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6213in the same directory as FILENAME.
6214
6215This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6216works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6217can become a bottleneck.
6218
6219The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6220does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6221create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6222file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6223rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6224so useful that the change is worth while.
6225
6226When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6227are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6228collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6229tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6230
6231** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6232it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6233show-paren-mode.
6234
6235** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6236selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6237delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6238
6239** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6240within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6241complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6242
6243** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6244it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6245set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6246
6247** Changes in View mode.
6248
6249*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6250Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6251
6252*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6253view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6254
6255*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6256previous state.
6257
6258*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6259scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6260
6261*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6262non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6263not just the selected window.
6264
6265*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6266read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6267turns View mode on or off.
6268
6269*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6270how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6271delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6272
6273** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6274now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6275
6276** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6277has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6278presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6279which version to compare with.
6280
6281** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6282blocks if a match is inside the block.
6283
6284The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6285is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6286isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6287shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6288
6289By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6290of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6291blocks, all of them or none.
6292
6293** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6294current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6295confirmation first.
6296
6297** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6298now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6299However, the mode will not be changed if
6300(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6301(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6302 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6303(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6304
6305This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6306
6307However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6308these commands do not change the major mode.
6309
6310** M-x occur changes.
6311
6312*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6313it performs a case-sensitive search.
6314
6315*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6316if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6317using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6318
6319** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6320in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6321window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6322that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6323buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6324
6325** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6326after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6327appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6328come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6329
6330** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6331selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6332buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6333
6334** Outline mode changes.
6335
6336*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6337
6338*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6339
6340** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6341you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6342Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6343was already active.
6344
6345The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6346unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6347get confused by it.
6348
6349If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6350set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6351
6352** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6353
6354*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6355conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6356character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6357including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6358
6359The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6360mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6361copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6362
6363*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6364are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6365values.
6366
6367`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6368case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6369`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6370case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6371
6372** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6373certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6374can be. The default value is 30.
6375
6376** Changes in Mail mode.
6377
6378*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6379Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6380composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6381`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6382`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6383behavior.
6384
6385C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6386compose-mail-other-frame.
6387
6388*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6389the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6390replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6391buffer that shows the original message.
6392
6393*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6394with separator lines around the contents.
6395
6396*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6397in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6398definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6399need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6400
6401*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6402
6403**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6404for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6405controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6406Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6407
6408**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6409to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6410/etc/passwd.
6411
6412**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6413to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6414/etc/passwd.
6415
6416** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6417special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6418directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6419reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6420
6421Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6422when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6423be taken to be magic.
6424
6425** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6426files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6427available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6428
6429M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6430(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6431
6432** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6433suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6434
6435In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6436
6437new key dired.el binding old key
6438------- ---------------- -------
6439 * c dired-change-marks c
6440 * m dired-mark m
6441 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6442 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6443 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6444 * u dired-unmark u
6445 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6446 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6447 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6448 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6449 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6450 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6451
6452** Rmail changes.
6453
6454*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6455saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6456chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6457each time you run it.
6458
6459*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6460whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6461
6462*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6463messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6464means to move in the opposite direction.
6465
6466*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6467you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6468
6469*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6470just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6471It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6472can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6473for output.
6474
6475** Gnus changes.
6476
6477*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6478
6479*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6480Gnus.
6481
6482*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6483`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6484
6485*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6486article mode line.
6487
6488*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6489
6490*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6491
6492(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6493
6494*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6495are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6496`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6497
6498*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6499
6500*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6501
6502*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6503See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6504
6505*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6506Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6507used to pick articles.
6508
6509*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6510another have been added.
6511
6512 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6513
6514*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6515generating lines in buffers.
6516
6517*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6518`M-C-_'.
6519
6520*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6521
6522*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6523
6524 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6525
6526*** Scores can be decayed.
6527
6528 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6529
6530*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6531Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6532
6533*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6534the native server.
6535
6536 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6537
6538*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6539(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6540
6541*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6542
6543*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6544even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6545
6546*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6547(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6548
6549 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6550 a group.
6551
6552*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6553sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6554
6555 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6556
6557*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6558
6559 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6560
6561*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6562
6563 Use the `Y c' command.
6564
6565*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6566
6567*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6568
6569 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6570
6571*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6572from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6573
6574 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6575
6576*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6577
6578*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6579the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6580
6581 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6582
6583Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6584and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6585from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6586hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6587this issue.)
6588
6589Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6590automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6591particular news group. This can be done by:
6592
6593 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6594
6595Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6596of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6597"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6598system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6599for reading and posting).
6600
6601CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6602 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6603Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6604newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6605there.
6606
6607Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6608default. Here are some of these default settings:
6609
6610 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6611 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6612 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6613 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6614 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6615
6616When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6617the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6618
6619** CC mode changes.
6620
6621*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6622code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6623values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6624this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6625Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6626loaded.
6627
6628If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6629Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6630style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6631share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6632c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6633must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6634
6635*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6636of the current buffer.
6637
6638*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6639it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6640of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6641
6642*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6643style that the Python developers like.
6644
6645*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6646This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6647just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6648
6649** VC Changes [new]
6650
6651** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6652name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6653directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6654
6655This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6656master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6657developers.
6658
6659You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6660RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6661
6662*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6663other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6664writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6665calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6666
6667*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6668version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6669
6670** Calendar changes.
6671
6672A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6673of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6674for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6675
6676** ps-print changes
6677
6678There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6679
6680*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6681
6682The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6683formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6684`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6685`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6686It defaults to `letter'.
6687If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6688
6689The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6690of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6691non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6692
6693The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6694It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6695It defaults to 1.
6696
6697*** Horizontal layout
6698
6699The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6700`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6701All are measured in points.
6702
6703*** Vertical layout
6704
6705The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6706`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6707All are measured in points.
6708
6709*** Headers
6710
6711If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6712`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6713margin above the text.
6714
6715If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6716framing box is printed around the header.
6717
6718The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6719`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6720
6721The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6722`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6723`ps-header-font-size'.
6724
6725*** Font managing
6726
6727The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6728used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6729`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6730elements to this alist.
6731
6732The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6733for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6734
6735** hideshow changes.
6736
6737*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6738C++, ; for lisp).
6739
6740*** Support for java-mode added.
6741
6742*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6743in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6744
6745*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6746the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6747way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6748
6749*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6750robust and a lot faster.
6751
6752*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6753
6754*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6755to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6756documentation for more details.
6757
6758** Changes in Enriched mode.
6759
6760*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6761filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6762of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6763use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6764the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6765
6766*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6767distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6768as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6769as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6770
6771** Font Lock mode
6772
6773*** Custom support
6774
6775The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6776font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6777faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6778group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6779your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6780consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6781
6782You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6783
6784*** Maximum decoration
6785
6786Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6787default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6788of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6789supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6790to get the old behavior.
6791
6792*** New support
6793
6794Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6795
6796Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6797support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6798
6799*** Configurable support
6800
6801Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6802additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6803c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6804java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6805list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6806of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6807convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6808
6809Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6810way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6811it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6812
6813*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6814
6815You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6816highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6817for any mode.
6818
6819For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6820
6821 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6822
6823in your ~/.emacs.
6824
6825*** New faces
6826
6827Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6828font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6829distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6830to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6831
6832*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6833
6834The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6835cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6836same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6837
6838*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6839
6840The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6841according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6842the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6843non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6844refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6845the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6846Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6847
6848This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6849For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6850this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6851refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6852containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6853the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6854
6855As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6856
6857Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6858Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6859Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6860new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6861
6862If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6863settings.
6864
6865** Ada mode changes.
6866
6867*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6868If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6869procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6870you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6871stubs.
6872
6873*** There are two new commands:
6874 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6875 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6876
6877The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6878`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6879`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6880
6881*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6882is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6883Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6884
6885*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6886formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6887places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6888space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6889
6890** Scheme mode changes.
6891
6892*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6893mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6894for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6895with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6896have any effect.
6897
6898If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6899still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6900scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6901variables as buffer-local variables.
6902
6903*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6904Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6905
6906** Changes to the emacsclient program
6907
6908*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6909USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6910associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6911can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6912
6913*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6914it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6915buffer in Emacs.
6916
6917*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6918use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6919ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6920option takes precedence.
6921
6922** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6923constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6924(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6925
6926** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6927which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6928the current defun.
6929
6930** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6931following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6932
6933** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6934and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6935necessary).
6936
6937** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6938if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6939these register values no longer become completely useless.
6940If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6941asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6942it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6943
6944** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6945example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6946be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6947you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6948
6949You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6950variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6951file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6952revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6953only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6954
6955** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6956since it applies only to the current frame.
6957
6958** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6959file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6960and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6961
6962This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6963multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6964variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6965tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6966instead of just the file you are editing.
6967
6968** RefTeX mode
6969
6970RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6971and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6972different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6973multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6974turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6975
6976C-c ( reftex-label
6977 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6978 knows which kind of label is needed.
6979
6980C-c ) reftex-reference
6981 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6982 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6983
6984C-c [ reftex-citation
6985 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6986 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6987
6988C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6989 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6990
6991C-c = reftex-toc
6992 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6993 can quickly jump to every section.
6994
6995Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6996commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6997Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6998reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6999C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7000
7001** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7002
7003*** Info documentation is now available.
7004
7005*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7006both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7007
7008*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7009bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7010
7011*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7012(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7013
7014*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7015entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7016appropriate functions.
7017
7018*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7019entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7020
7021*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7022been cleaned.
7023
7024*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7025bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7026
7027*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7028shall be delimited.
7029
7030*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7031bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7032bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7033
7034*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7035field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7036prefixed with `ALT'.
7037
7038*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7039bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7040formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7041documentation).
7042
7043*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7044documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7045for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7046
7047*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7048comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7049
7050*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7051alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7052signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7053
7054*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7055
7056*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7057
7058*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7059from alien sources.
7060
7061*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7062to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7063crossref entries.
7064
7065*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7066region.
7067
7068*** Added support for imenu.
7069
7070*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7071of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7072`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7073`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7074
7075*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7076from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7077
7078** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7079
7080** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7081
7082** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7083functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7084Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7085as an argument.
7086
7087When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7088and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7089
7090** browse-url changes
7091
7092*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7093Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7094(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7095non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7096customization variables.
7097
7098*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7099
7100*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7101lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7102(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7103
7104** Changes in Ediff
7105
7106*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7107pops up the Info file for this command.
7108
7109*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7110the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7111merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7112directories).
7113
7114*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7115and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7116files in the same directory.
7117
7118*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7119The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7120related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7121
7122** Changes in Viper
7123
7124*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7125*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7126 instead of vip-.
7127*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7128*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7129Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7130*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7131*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7132*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7133color when Viper is in insert state.
7134*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7135Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7136viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7137
7138** Etags changes.
7139
7140*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7141default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7142Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7143variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7144not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7145
7146*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7147
7148*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7149constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7150
7151*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7152recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7153In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7154
7155*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7156C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7157recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7158methods and protocols.
7159
7160*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7161.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7162column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7163paragraph name.
7164
7165*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7166an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7167at least M times and as many as N times.
7168
7169** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7170in files has changed slightly.
7171
7172With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7173time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7174This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7175with old time-stamp-format values.
7176
7177In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7178(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7179This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7180reasons.
7181
7182In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7183natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7184fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7185(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7186time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7187specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7188
7189Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7190case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7191truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7192
7193The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7194being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7195future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7196recommended now will continue to work then.
7197
7198See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7199details.
7200
7201** There are some additional major modes:
7202
7203dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7204m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7205meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7206
7207** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7208copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7209into Emacs.
7210
7211** New Lisp packages include:
7212
7213*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7214
7215*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7216be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7217
7218*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7219
7220*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7221in shell buffers.
7222
7223*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7224See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7225and `elint-defun'.
7226
7227*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7228meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7229ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7230strings or comments.
7231
7232These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7233abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7234you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7235insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7236at these points.
7237
7238*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7239can visit them by short forms of their names.
7240
7241*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7242Emacs Lisp function at point.
7243
7244*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7245
7246*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7247switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7248
7249*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7250
7251*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7252
7253*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7254
7255*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7256from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7257
7258*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7259You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7260inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7261original place after inserting the copy.
7262
7263*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7264on the buffer.
7265
7266You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7267velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7268(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7269
7270Enable mouse-drag with:
7271 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7272-or-
7273 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7274
7275*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7276mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7277
7278*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7279It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7280
7281*** ogonek
7282
7283The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7284Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7285platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7286TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7287ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7288prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7289instance) and vice versa.
7290
7291To use this package load it using
7292 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7293Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7294 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7295 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7296The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7297ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7298
7299*** Interface to ph.
7300
7301Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7302
7303The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7304services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7305these servers.
7306
7307*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7308
7309*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7310You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7311while the real cursor does not move.
7312
7313*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7314for visiting your favorite web sites.
7315
7316*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7317so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7318
7319** movemail change
7320
7321Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7322mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7323supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7324user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7325
7326This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7327\f
7328* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7329
7330** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7331
7332Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7333end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7334Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7335file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7336file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7337
7338To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7339C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7340coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7341specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7342LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7343save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7344\f
7345* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7346
7347** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7348Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7349vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7350Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7351
7352** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7353to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7354
7355In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7356don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7357"win".
7358
7359** Basic Lisp changes
7360
7361*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7362evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7363
7364*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7365be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7366or by the user.
7367
7368The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7369
7370*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7371
7372(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7373(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7374
7375*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7376usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7377its argument.
7378
7379*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7380
7381*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7382
7383*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7384
7385*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7386error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7387include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7388`format' function.
7389
7390*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7391or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7392whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7393
7394*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7395either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7396adding one of these suffixes.
7397
7398*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7399which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7400If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7401
7402We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7403because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7404
7405*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7406
7407*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7408You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7409
7410*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7411conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7412
7413 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7414
7415BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7416BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7417
7418*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7419choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7420restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7421works using `save-current-buffer'.
7422
7423*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7424write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7425of the last form.
7426
7427*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7428which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7429last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7430as the last form.
7431
7432*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7433characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7434matches.
7435
7436For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7437
7438*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7439with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7440Then it returns that string.
7441
7442For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7443
7444(with-output-to-string
7445 (princ "The buffer is ")
7446 (princ (buffer-name)))
7447
7448returns "The buffer is foo".
7449
7450** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7451is non-nil.
7452
7453These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7454buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7455characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7456
7457*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7458a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7459
7460Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7461character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7462Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7463position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7464characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7465 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7466
7467ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7468Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7469non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7470characters".
7471
7472The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7473through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7474"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7475range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7476leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7477
7478*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7479(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7480multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7481character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7482
7483This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7484always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7485
7486However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7487
7488*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7489because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7490have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7491the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7492guaranteed.
7493
7494*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7495between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7496character).
7497
7498When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7499
7500 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7501 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7502 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7503 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7504 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7505
7506*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7507
7508*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7509`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7510more than the number of characters.
7511
7512You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7513it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7514\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7515is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7516follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7517newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7518
7519*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7520and returns a string containing those characters.
7521
7522*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7523(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7524counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7525character, sref signals an error.
7526
7527*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7528in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7529string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7530
7531*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7532in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7533region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7534
7535*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7536the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7537to a vector of the characters in it.
7538
7539*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7540of a string. You call it as follows:
7541
7542 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7543
7544This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7545STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7546This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7547Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7548it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7549
7550*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7551if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7552
7553*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7554if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7555
7556*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7557to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7558not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7559which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7560
7561(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7562
7563This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7564
7565The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7566If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7567are not included in the resulting value.
7568
7569The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7570at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7571WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7572is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7573
7574If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7575place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7576character extends across that column), then the padding character
7577PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7578string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7579column START-COLUMN.
7580
7581*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7582the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7583necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7584difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7585changed text, before the change.
7586
7587*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7588sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7589one character set for each script, not for each language.
7590
7591**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7592
7593**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7594
7595**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7596set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7597
7598**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7599name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7600which identify the character within that character set.
7601
7602**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7603byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7604opposite of split-char.
7605
7606**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7607of all the characters between BEG and END.
7608
7609**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7610of all the characters in a string.
7611
7612*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7613and specifying coding systems.
7614
7615**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7616system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7617of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7618(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7619and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7620as what to do about code conversion.)
7621
7622**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7623name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7624
7625**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7626for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7627except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7628
7629Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7630which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7631to match against a file name.
7632
7633VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7634a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7635decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7636to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7637systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7638specifies the coding system for encoding.
7639
7640If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7641or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7642
7643**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7644the coding system to use for network sockets.
7645
7646Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7647which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7648either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7649service names.
7650
7651VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7652a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7653decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7654to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7655systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7656specifies the coding system for encoding.
7657
7658If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7659or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7660
7661**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7662for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7663except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7664start the subprocess.
7665
7666**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7667systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7668when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7669(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7670to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7671
7672**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7673coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7674subprocess.
7675
7676It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7677but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7678start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7679connection permanently or until overridden.
7680
7681The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7682file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7683network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7684coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7685It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7686system for one operation at a time.
7687
7688**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7689files, subprocesses or network connections.
7690
7691**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7692coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7693The value is a cons cell,
7694 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7695where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7696the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7697input to the subprocess.
7698
7699**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7700change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7701
7702** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7703customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7704you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7705
7706You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7707variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7708information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7709legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7710customization.
7711
7712Thus, instead of writing
7713
7714 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7715 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7716
7717you would now write this:
7718
7719 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7720 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7721 :type 'boolean
7722 :group foo)
7723
7724The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7725two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7726describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7727for a description of them.
7728
7729The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7730should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7731
7732 (defgroup ispell nil
7733 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7734 :group 'processes)
7735
7736The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7737group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7738but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7739to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7740second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7741
7742Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7743package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7744have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7745package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7746first-level subgroups.
7747
7748** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7749
7750This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7751separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7752
7753** easy-mmode
7754
7755The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7756developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7757only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7758predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7759`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7760`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7761
7762** Text property changes
7763
7764*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7765text property.
7766
7767*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7768previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7769place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7770functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7771starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7772
7773If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7774LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7775of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7776position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7777
7778*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7779value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7780is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7781
7782** Changes in invisibility features
7783
7784*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7785hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7786is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7787should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7788would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7789make the overlay visible.
7790
7791During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7792invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7793needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7794which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7795the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7796t when it should hide it.
7797
7798*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7799
7800Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7801invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7802and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7803Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7804manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7805Here is an example of how to do this:
7806
7807 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7808 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7809 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7810 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7811
7812 ...
7813 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7814
7815 ...
7816 ;; When done with the overlays:
7817 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7818 ;; Or respectively:
7819 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7820
7821** Changes in syntax parsing.
7822
7823*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7824`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7825obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7826`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7827
7828If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7829is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7830used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7831
7832When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7833character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7834
7835 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7836 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7837
7838 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7839 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7840 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7841
7842 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7843 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7844 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7845 determine the syntax type of the character.
7846
7847 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7848 of the current buffer.
7849
7850*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7851value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7852for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7853
7854*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7855and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7856only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7857character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7858another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7859
7860These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7861text property.
7862
7863*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7864arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7865of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7866
7867*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7868(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7869element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7870nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7871string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7872
7873*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7874syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7875`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7876
7877** Changes in face features
7878
7879*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7880if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7881
7882*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7883of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7884
7885*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7886set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7887
7888*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7889set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7890
7891*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7892by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7893and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7894the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7895overlay property).
7896
7897This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7898arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7899
7900** Changes in file-handling functions
7901
7902*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7903directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7904they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7905is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7906
7907This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7908begins with ~.
7909
7910*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7911it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7912
7913*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7914the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7915
7916*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7917as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7918
7919*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7920character code conversion as well as other things.
7921
7922Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7923(formerly it did not).
7924
7925*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7926environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7927
7928*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7929instead of constant strings.
7930
7931*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7932to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7933any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7934
7935substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7936in the same way as before.
7937
7938*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7939The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7940which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7941
7942*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7943error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7944else, and returns nil.
7945
7946*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7947directory cannot be listed.
7948
7949** Changes in minibuffer input
7950
7951*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7952read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7953additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7954argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7955ways:
7956
7957 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7958 It is available through the history command M-n.
7959
7960*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7961read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7962argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7963minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7964enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7965
7966In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7967argument in this way.
7968
7969*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7970from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7971minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7972
7973** Echo area features
7974
7975*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7976echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7977minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7978after the echo area is cleared.
7979
7980*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7981in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7982
7983** Keyboard input features
7984
7985*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7986set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7987
7988*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7989received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7990by keyboard macros.
7991
7992** Frame-related changes
7993
7994*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7995creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7996hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7997
7998*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7999the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8000has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8001
8002*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8003selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8004value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8005in the selected frame.
8006
8007*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8008is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8009which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8010
8011** X Windows features
8012
8013*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8014x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8015x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8016
8017*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8018The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8019
8020*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8021MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8022A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8023
8024If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8025it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8026
8027** Subprocess features
8028
8029*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8030functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8031automatically.
8032
8033*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8034and returns the output from the command as a string.
8035
8036*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8037and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8038
8039** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8040does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8041
8042** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8043at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8044goes after the other menu items.
8045
8046** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8047of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8048around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8049are in use.
8050
8051The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8052series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8053
8054Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8055after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8056form.
8057
8058** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8059is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8060but its hook is still run.
8061
8062** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8063for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8064
8065If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8066regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8067useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8068
8069This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8070are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8071filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8072warned.
8073
8074** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8075way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8076
8077** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8078integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8079functions like display-time.
8080
8081** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8082name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8083
8084** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8085can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8086is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8087
8088** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8089if there is an error in compilation.
8090
8091** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8092switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8093argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8094they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8095
8096** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8097Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8098the *scratch* buffer.
8099
8100** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8101The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8102where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8103e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8104
8105** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8106and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8107It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8108
8109** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8110using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8111variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8112and compose-mail-other-frame.
8113
8114** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8115can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8116full name of the specified user will be returned.
8117
8118** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8119of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8120where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8121in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8122option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8123files at all.
8124
8125** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8126and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8127width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8128the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8129
8130For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8131minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8132with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8133is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8134
8135** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8136
8137** imenu.el changes.
8138
8139You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8140item from menu created by imenu.
8141
8142An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8143#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8144select one of those items.
8145\f
8146* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8147\f
8148* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8149
8150** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8151mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8152
8153** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8154use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8155Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8156\f
8157* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8158
8159** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8160To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8161
8162** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8163conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8164matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8165expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8166word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8167all caps.
8168
8169** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8170at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8171
8172When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8173does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8174as in previous Emacs versions.
8175
8176** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8177non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8178time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8179frames.
8180
8181** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8182if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8183This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8184Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8185accident.
8186
8187** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8188keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8189It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8190line and then executing the macro.
8191
8192This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8193
8194** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8195(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8196characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8197characters.
8198
8199** Font Lock mode
8200
8201*** Font Lock support modes
8202
8203Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8204below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8205hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8206to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8207Font Lock mode is enabled.
8208
8209For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8210
8211 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8212
8213in your ~/.emacs.
8214
8215*** lazy-lock
8216
8217The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8218only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8219becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8220Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8221occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8222buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8223Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8224
8225To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8226
8227 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8228
8229To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8230
8231** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8232
8233*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8234paren and key.
8235
8236*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8237supported.
8238
8239** Gnus changes.
8240
8241Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8242commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8243significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8244previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8245
8246Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8247between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8248
8249*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8250variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8251obsolete.
8252
8253*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8254missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8255
8256 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8257
8258*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8259
8260 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8261
8262*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8263referred.
8264
8265*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8266
8267 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8268
8269*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8270
8271 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8272
8273*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8274buffers.
8275
8276 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8277
8278*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8279
8280 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8281
8282*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8283
8284 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8285
8286*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8287
8288 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8289
8290*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8291is possible.
8292
8293 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8294
8295*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8296groups of groups.
8297
8298*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8299
8300*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8301batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8302
8303*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8304
8305*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8306
8307*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8308
8309 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8310
8311*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8312expiration times.
8313
8314*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8315
8316*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8317process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8318
8319*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8320articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8321bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8322
8323*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8324articles with the `*' command.
8325
8326*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8327
8328*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8329
8330 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8331
8332*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8333
8334*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8335`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8336
8337*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8338buffer.
8339
8340*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8341
8342*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8343
8344*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8345
8346 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8347
8348*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8349
8350 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8351
8352*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8353
8354*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8355
8356*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8357
8358 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8359 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8360
8361*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8362refetching.
8363
8364 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8365
8366*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8367buffer to allow easier treatment.
8368
8369*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8370
8371*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8372
8373 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8374
8375*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8376articles.
8377
8378 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8379
8380*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8381
8382*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8383cited text to hide is now customizable.
8384
8385 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8386
8387*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8388
8389 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8390
8391*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8392
8393*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8394
8395The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8396in greater detail.
8397\f
8398* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8399
8400** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8401second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8402asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8403exists.
8404
8405** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8406as well as lists.
8407
8408** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8409of a given keymap.
8410
8411** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8412given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8413keymap or nil.
8414
8415** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8416an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8417name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8418menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8419equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8420alias.
8421\f
8422* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8423
8424** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8425
8426Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8427This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8428was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8429far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8430pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8431
8432For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8433you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8434`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8435
8436** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8437
8438The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8439do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8440It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8441much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8442chapter of the manual for details.
8443
8444However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8445customization variables take effect.
8446
8447** Marking with the mouse.
8448
8449When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8450highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8451using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8452
8453** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8454
8455*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8456
8457*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8458to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8459
8460*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8461in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8462you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8463application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8464applications, these problems are significant.
8465
8466If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8467likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8468However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8469will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8470other DOS application as a subprocess.
8471
8472Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8473You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8474
8475If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8476subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8477have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8478Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8479separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8480Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8481
8482** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8483
8484This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8485which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8486minibuffer contains.
8487
8488** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8489
8490The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8491It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8492It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8493affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8494
8495The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8496it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8497and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8498when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8499
8500** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8501enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8502
8503** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8504F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8505Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8506
8507If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8508menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8509something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8510the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8511
8512 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8513
8514** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8515to replace the characters it "deletes".
8516
8517** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8518
8519** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8520a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8521select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8522It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8523immediately after the selected one.
8524
8525This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8526made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8527
8528** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8529
8530Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8531directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8532If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8533Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8534recover-session.
8535
8536You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8537auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8538will not work.
8539
8540Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8541normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8542this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8543bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8544now that the bug is fixed.
8545
8546** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8547
8548There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8549when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8550Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8551which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8552
8553If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8554telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8555VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8556the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8557
8558** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8559Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8560is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8561
8562There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8563Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8564enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8565The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8566remain normal.
8567
8568** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8569header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8570
8571Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8572known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8573offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8574Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8575
8576Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8577of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8578a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8579name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8580documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8581`mail-directory-stream'.)
8582
8583** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8584skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8585characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8586with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8587
8588Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8589- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8590wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8591
8592The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8593less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8594headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8595Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8596Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8597fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8598to a limitation in font-lock).
8599
8600External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8601
8602** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8603buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8604buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8605this example:
8606
8607 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8608 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8609
8610** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8611
8612*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8613
8614*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8615
8616*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8617
8618*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8619entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8620will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8621isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8622(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8623The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8624
8625*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8626does the same job.
8627
8628*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8629"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8630
8631*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8632text.
8633
8634** Font Lock mode
8635
8636*** Global Font Lock mode
8637
8638Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8639new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8640font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8641turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8642on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8643
8644For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8645
8646 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8647
8648in your ~/.emacs.
8649
8650*** Local Refontification
8651
8652In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8653However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8654those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8655command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8656
8657In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8658(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8659current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8660above and below point.
8661
8662With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8663
8664** Follow mode
8665
8666Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8667buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8668side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8669they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8670split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8671follow-mode.
8672
8673M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8674
8675To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8676command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8677
8678** hide-show changes.
8679
8680The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8681to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8682normal hooks.
8683
8684** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8685The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8686
8687** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8688recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8689those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8690
8691** MSDOS Changes
8692
8693*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8694Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8695
8696*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8697and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8698
8699*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8700
8701*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8702pressing both mouse buttons.
8703
8704*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8705restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8706are:
8707
8708**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8709now works.
8710
8711**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8712
8713**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8714implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8715
8716**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8717
8718**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8719
8720**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8721
8722**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8723
8724**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8725\f
8726* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8727
8728** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8729tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8730remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8731this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8732behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8733
8734** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8735
8736The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8737not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8738need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8739be different.
8740
8741It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8742than `system-type'.
8743
8744See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8745
8746** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8747now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8748
8749** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8750that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8751
8752** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8753no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8754reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8755
8756The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8757to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8758like this:
8759
8760 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8761
8762SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8763It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8764becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8765
8766REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8767seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8768means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8769
8770*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8771up if too much time passes.
8772
8773 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8774
8775This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8776If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8777of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8778form in BODY.
8779
8780*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8781a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8782call looks like this:
8783
8784 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8785
8786SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8787runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8788timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8789ARGS.
8790
8791Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8792command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8793command.
8794
8795REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8796time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8797does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8798each time Emacs becomes idle.
8799
8800If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8801idle for SECS seconds.
8802
8803*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8804all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8805programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8806instead.
8807
8808*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8809there is no answer within a certain time.
8810
8811 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8812
8813asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8814within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8815Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8816
8817** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8818arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8819meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8820arguments in between are ignored.
8821
8822This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8823the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8824
8825** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8826/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8827/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8828site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8829version.
8830
8831It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8832version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8833for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8834has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8835and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8836problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8837
8838** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8839.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8840systems with limited file name syntax.
8841
8842Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8843convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8844for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8845completions.el:
8846
8847(defvar save-completions-file-name
8848 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8849 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8850
8851This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8852depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8853convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8854Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8855MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8856
8857** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8858rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8859minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8860
8861** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8862marker from its buffer position.
8863
8864** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8865Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8866The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8867
8868** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8869that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8870condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8871of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8872matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8873regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8874
8875This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8876errors that happen often during editing.
8877
8878** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8879into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8880puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8881
8882** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8883now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8884
8885** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8886a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8887name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8888to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8889and not get-buffer-window.
8890
8891** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8892calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8893being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8894
8895If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8896buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8897property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8898non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8899are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8900property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8901over and over for the same text.
8902
8903** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8904
8905*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8906in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8907
8908;; @(#) HEADER: text
8909;; $HEADER: text $
8910
8911in addition to the normal
8912
8913;; HEADER: text
8914
8915*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8916checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8917lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8918
8919
a933dad1 8920\f
3787e12e 8921* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8922
8923----------------------------------------------------------------------
8924Copyright information:
8925
424d8b44 8926Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8927
8928 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8929 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8930 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8931 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8932
8933 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8934 of this document, or of portions of it,
8935 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8936 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8937\f
8938Local variables:
8939mode: outline
8940paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8941end: